blob: 03e1dfd311f7665e5410f89599b296820d27dac3 [file] [log] [blame]
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001/*
Johannes Berg3017b802007-08-28 17:01:53 -04002 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
3 *
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
5 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +02006 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
Johannes Bergd98ad832014-09-03 15:24:57 +03007 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
Avraham Sterne38a0172017-04-26 10:58:47 +03008 * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH
Ilan Peer94ba9272018-02-19 14:48:41 +02009 * Copyright (C) 2018 Intel Corporation
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070010 *
11 * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
12 * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 as
13 * published by the Free Software Foundation.
14 */
15
16#ifndef MAC80211_H
17#define MAC80211_H
18
Paul Gortmaker187f1882011-11-23 20:12:59 -050019#include <linux/bug.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070020#include <linux/kernel.h>
21#include <linux/if_ether.h>
22#include <linux/skbuff.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070023#include <linux/ieee80211.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070024#include <net/cfg80211.h>
Michal Kazior5caa3282016-05-19 10:37:51 +020025#include <net/codel.h>
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +030026#include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h>
Johannes Berg42d987952011-07-07 18:58:01 +020027#include <asm/unaligned.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070028
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040029/**
30 * DOC: Introduction
31 *
32 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
33 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
34 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
35 * drivers.
36 */
37
38/**
39 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
40 *
41 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070042 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
43 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
44 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +010045 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
46 * tasklet function.
47 *
48 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -070049 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070050 */
51
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040052/**
53 * DOC: Warning
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070054 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040055 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
56 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
57 */
58
59/**
60 * DOC: Frame format
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070061 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040062 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
63 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
64 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
65 * hardware.
66 *
67 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
68 *
69 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
70 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
71 *
72 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
73 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070074 */
75
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +020076/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -040077 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
78 *
79 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
80 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
81 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
82 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
83 *
84 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
85 * suspend.
86 *
87 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
88 *
89 */
90
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +010091/**
92 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
93 *
94 * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
95 * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
96 * between different stations/interfaces.
97 * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
98 * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
99 * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
100 *
101 * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
102 * driver operation.
103 *
Johannes Bergadf8ed02018-08-31 11:31:08 +0300104 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with
105 * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and
106 * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +0100107 *
108 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
109 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
110 *
Johannes Berge7881bd52017-12-19 10:11:54 +0100111 * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame, it calls
112 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a queue, it
113 * calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +0100114 *
115 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
116 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
117 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
118 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
119 * .release_buffered_frames().
120 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
121 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
122 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
123 */
124
Paul Gortmaker313162d2012-01-30 11:46:54 -0500125struct device;
126
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -0400127/**
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200128 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
129 *
130 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +0100131 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200132 */
133enum ieee80211_max_queues {
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200134 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16,
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +0100135 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200136};
137
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200138#define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff
139
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200140/**
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800141 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
142 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
143 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
144 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
145 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
146 */
147enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
148 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0,
149 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1,
150 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2,
151 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3,
152};
153
154/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400155 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
156 *
157 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100158 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400159 *
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -0400160 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200161 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
162 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400163 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100164 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300165 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +0200166 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +0300167 * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured
168 * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400169 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700170struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200171 u16 txop;
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100172 u16 cw_min;
173 u16 cw_max;
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200174 u8 aifs;
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300175 bool acm;
Kalle Valoab133152010-01-12 10:42:31 +0200176 bool uapsd;
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +0300177 bool mu_edca;
178 struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700179};
180
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700181struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
182 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
183 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
184 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
185 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
186};
187
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100188/**
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200189 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100190 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200191 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100192 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200193 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
194 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200195 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200196 */
197enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100198 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0),
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200199 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1),
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100200 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2),
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200201 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3),
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200202 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4),
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200203};
204
205/**
206 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
207 *
208 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
209 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
210 *
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100211 * @def: the channel definition
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200212 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200213 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
214 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
215 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
216 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
Simon Wunderlich5d7fad42012-11-30 19:17:28 +0100217 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100218 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200219 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
220 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
221 */
222struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100223 struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200224 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200225
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200226 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
227
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100228 bool radar_enabled;
229
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +0100230 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200231};
232
233/**
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +0300234 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
235 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
236 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
237 * needs to be switched from one to the other.
238 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
239 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
240 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
241 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
242 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
243 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
244 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
245 * for changes/removal.)
246 */
247enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
248 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
249 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
250};
251
252/**
253 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
254 *
255 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
256 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The
257 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
258 * done.
259 *
260 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
261 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
262 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
263 */
264struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
265 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
266 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
267 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
268};
269
270/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100271 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
272 *
273 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
274 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
275 *
276 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
277 * also implies a change in the AID.
278 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
279 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300280 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
Tomas Winkler38668c02008-03-28 16:33:32 -0700281 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200282 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200283 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200284 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
285 * reason (IBSS and managed mode)
286 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
287 * new beacon (beaconing modes)
288 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
289 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200290 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200291 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300292 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200293 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
294 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200295 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200296 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200297 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300298 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200299 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100300 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +0200301 * changed
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300302 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
303 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100304 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
305 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
306 * context had been assigned.
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100307 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200308 * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed
Avraham Sterne38a0172017-04-26 10:58:47 +0300309 * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected
310 * keep alive) changed.
Pradeep Kumar Chitrapudcbe73c2018-03-22 12:18:03 -0700311 * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface
312 *
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100313 */
314enum ieee80211_bss_change {
315 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0,
316 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1,
317 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2,
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300318 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3,
Alexander Simona7ce1c92011-09-18 00:16:45 +0200319 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4,
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200320 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5,
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200321 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6,
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200322 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7,
323 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8,
324 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9,
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200325 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10,
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200326 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11,
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300327 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12,
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200328 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13,
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200329 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14,
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300330 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15,
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200331 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16,
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300332 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17,
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200333 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18,
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100334 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19,
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300335 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20,
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100336 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21,
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100337 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22,
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200338 BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS = 1<<23,
Avraham Sterne38a0172017-04-26 10:58:47 +0300339 BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE = 1<<24,
Pradeep Kumar Chitrapudcbe73c2018-03-22 12:18:03 -0700340 BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE = 1<<25,
Johannes Bergac8dd502010-05-05 09:44:02 +0200341
342 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100343};
344
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300345/*
346 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
347 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
348 * filtering will be disabled.
349 */
350#define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
351
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100352/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200353 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
354 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200355 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300356 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300357 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
358 * they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
359 * once each time the timeout triggers.
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700360 */
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200361enum ieee80211_event_type {
362 RSSI_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200363 MLME_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300364 BAR_RX_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300365 BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200366};
367
368/**
369 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
370 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
371 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
372 */
373enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700374 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
375 RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
376};
377
378/**
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200379 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200380 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
381 */
382struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
383 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
384};
385
386/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200387 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
388 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
Emmanuel Grumbachd0d1a122015-03-16 23:23:36 +0200389 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
Emmanuel Grumbacha90faa92015-03-16 23:23:37 +0200390 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
391 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200392 */
393enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
394 AUTH_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbachd0d1a122015-03-16 23:23:36 +0200395 ASSOC_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha90faa92015-03-16 23:23:37 +0200396 DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
397 DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200398};
399
400/**
401 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
402 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
403 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
404 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
405 */
406enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
407 MLME_SUCCESS,
408 MLME_DENIED,
409 MLME_TIMEOUT,
410};
411
412/**
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200413 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200414 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
415 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
416 * @reason: the reason code if applicable
417 */
418struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
419 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
420 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
421 u16 reason;
422};
423
424/**
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300425 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
426 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
427 * @tid: the tid
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300428 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300429 */
430struct ieee80211_ba_event {
431 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
432 u16 tid;
433 u16 ssn;
434};
435
436/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200437 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200438 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200439 * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200440 * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300441 * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300442 * @u:union holding the fields above
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200443 */
444struct ieee80211_event {
445 enum ieee80211_event_type type;
446 union {
447 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200448 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300449 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200450 } u;
451};
452
453/**
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200454 * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data
455 *
456 * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO
457 *
458 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
459 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
460 */
461struct ieee80211_mu_group_data {
462 u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN];
463 u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN];
464};
465
466/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100467 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
468 *
469 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
470 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
471 *
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +0300472 * @bss_color: 6-bit value to mark inter-BSS frame, if BSS supports HE
473 * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE
474 * @multi_sta_back_32bit: supports BA bitmap of 32-bits in Multi-STA BACK
475 * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP
476 * @ack_enabled: indicates support to receive a multi-TID that solicits either
477 * ACK, BACK or both
478 * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field
479 * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us
480 * @he_support: does this BSS support HE
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100481 * @assoc: association status
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200482 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
483 * or not
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530484 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100485 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
486 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
Johannes Bergea1b2b452015-06-02 20:15:49 +0200487 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
488 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +0100489 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +0200490 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300491 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200492 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100493 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
494 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
495 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
496 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200497 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200498 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
499 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200500 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100501 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
502 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200503 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
504 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
505 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700506 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800507 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200508 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
509 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in
510 * the current band.
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300511 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100512 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200513 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
514 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100515 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
516 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200517 * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data
Johannes Berg074d46d2012-03-15 19:45:16 +0100518 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
Avri Altman22f66892015-08-18 16:52:07 +0300519 * This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
520 * Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
521 * be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200522 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
Johannes Berge86abc62015-10-22 17:35:14 +0200523 * implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
524 * cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
525 * relation to the newly configured threshold.
Andrew Zaborowski2c3c5f8c2017-02-10 04:50:22 +0100526 * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value
527 * implies disabled. This is an alternative mechanism to the single
528 * threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it.
529 * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200530 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300531 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
532 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
533 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
534 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100535 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
536 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
537 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200538 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200539 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
540 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
541 * your driver/device needs to do.
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300542 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
543 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200544 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300545 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
546 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200547 * @txpower: TX power in dBm
Lorenzo Bianconidb82d8a2015-01-14 12:55:08 +0100548 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
549 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
550 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
551 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
552 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
553 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100554 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +0200555 * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed
556 * to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS
557 * if it has associated clients without P2P PS support.
Avraham Sterne38a0172017-04-26 10:58:47 +0300558 * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from
559 * transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated.
560 * In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include
561 * a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element.
562 * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN
563 * protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the
564 * station.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100565 */
566struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200567 const u8 *bssid;
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +0300568 u8 bss_color;
569 u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext;
570 bool multi_sta_back_32bit;
571 bool uora_exists;
572 bool ack_enabled;
573 u8 uora_ocw_range;
574 u16 frame_time_rts_th;
575 bool he_support;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100576 /* association related data */
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200577 bool assoc, ibss_joined;
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530578 bool ibss_creator;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100579 u16 aid;
580 /* erp related data */
581 bool use_cts_prot;
582 bool use_short_preamble;
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300583 bool use_short_slot;
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200584 bool enable_beacon;
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800585 u8 dtim_period;
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700586 u16 beacon_int;
587 u16 assoc_capability;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200588 u64 sync_tsf;
589 u32 sync_device_ts;
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100590 u8 sync_dtim_count;
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +0100591 u32 basic_rates;
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300592 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +0200593 int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
Johannes Berg9ed6bcc2009-05-08 20:47:39 +0200594 u16 ht_operation_mode;
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200595 s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
596 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
Andrew Zaborowski2c3c5f8c2017-02-10 04:50:22 +0100597 s32 cqm_rssi_low;
598 s32 cqm_rssi_high;
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100599 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200600 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group;
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300601 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100602 int arp_addr_cnt;
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200603 bool qos;
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200604 bool idle;
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300605 bool ps;
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300606 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
607 size_t ssid_len;
608 bool hidden_ssid;
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200609 int txpower;
Lorenzo Bianconidb82d8a2015-01-14 12:55:08 +0100610 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100611 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +0200612 bool allow_p2p_go_ps;
Avraham Sterne38a0172017-04-26 10:58:47 +0300613 u16 max_idle_period;
614 bool protected_keep_alive;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100615};
616
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800617/**
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200618 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800619 *
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700620 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800621 *
Johannes Berg7351c6b2009-11-19 01:08:30 +0100622 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200623 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
624 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
625 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the
626 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
627 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
628 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
629 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
630 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
631 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
632 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
633 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200634 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200635 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
636 * station
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200637 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200638 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
639 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200640 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200641 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
Johannes Bergab5b5342009-08-07 16:28:09 +0200642 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
643 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
644 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
645 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
646 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
647 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
648 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
649 * hardware queue.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200650 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
651 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
652 * is for the whole aggregation.
Ron Rindjunsky429a3802008-07-01 14:16:03 +0300653 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
654 * so consider using block ack request (BAR).
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200655 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
656 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
657 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600658 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
659 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
660 * off-channel operation.
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100661 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
662 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
663 * it can be sent out.
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200664 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
665 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200666 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
667 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100668 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
669 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
670 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200671 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
672 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
673 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
674 * queue gets full.
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100675 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
676 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
677 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100678 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
679 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
680 * should kick the MLME state machine.
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200681 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
682 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
683 * status to user space)
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400684 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200685 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
686 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
Johannes Berg610dbc92011-01-06 22:36:44 +0100687 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
688 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
689 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
690 * handled properly by the device.
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200691 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
692 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
693 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530694 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
695 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
696 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200697 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
698 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
699 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
Johannes Bergdeeaee192011-09-29 16:04:35 +0200700 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
701 * PS-Poll responses.
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530702 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
703 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
704 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200705 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
706 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
707 * monitor injection).
Sujith Manoharan5cf16612014-12-10 21:26:11 +0530708 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
709 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
710 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
711 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
712 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200713 *
714 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
715 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800716 */
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200717enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200718 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200719 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1),
720 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2),
721 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3),
722 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4),
723 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5),
724 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6),
725 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7),
726 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8),
727 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9),
728 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10),
729 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11),
730 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12),
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600731 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13),
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100732 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(14),
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200733 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15),
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200734 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16),
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100735 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17),
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200736 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18),
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100737 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19),
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100738 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20),
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200739 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21),
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400740 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22),
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200741 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24),
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +0100742 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25),
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200743 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26),
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530744 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27),
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200745 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28),
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530746 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29),
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200747 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30),
Sujith Manoharan5cf16612014-12-10 21:26:11 +0530748 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200749};
750
Johannes Bergabe37c42010-06-07 11:12:27 +0200751#define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23
752
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200753/**
754 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
755 *
756 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
757 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
Sujith Manoharan6b127c72014-12-10 21:26:10 +0530758 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
759 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
Sven Eckelmanndfdfc2b2016-01-26 17:11:13 +0100760 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +0100761 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame
Toke Høiland-Jørgensenbb42f2d2016-09-22 19:04:20 +0200762 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200763 *
764 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
765 */
766enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
767 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0),
Sujith Manoharan6b127c72014-12-10 21:26:10 +0530768 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1),
Sven Eckelmanndfdfc2b2016-01-26 17:11:13 +0100769 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT = BIT(2),
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +0100770 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU = BIT(3),
Toke Høiland-Jørgensenbb42f2d2016-09-22 19:04:20 +0200771 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT = BIT(4),
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200772};
773
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200774/*
775 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
776 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
777 */
778#define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \
779 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \
780 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \
781 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \
782 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100783 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200784 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200785 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200786
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530787/**
788 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
789 * Rate Control algorithm.
790 *
791 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
792 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
793 *
794 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
795 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
796 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
797 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
798 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100799 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
800 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530801 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
802 * Greenfield mode.
803 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100804 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
805 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
806 * (80+80 isn't supported yet)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530807 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
808 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
809 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
810 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
811 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200812enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
813 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0),
814 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1),
815 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2),
816
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100817 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200818 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3),
819 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4),
820 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5),
821 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6),
822 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100823 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8),
824 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9),
825 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10),
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800826};
827
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200828
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200829/* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
830#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200831
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200832/* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
833#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
834
835/* maximum number of rate stages */
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200836#define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200837
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200838/* maximum number of rate table entries */
839#define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4
840
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200841/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200842 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200843 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200844 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
845 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
Johannes Berge25cf4a2008-10-23 08:51:20 +0200846 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200847 *
848 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
849 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
850 *
851 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
852 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200853 *
854 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
855 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
856 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
857 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +0300858 * information::
859 *
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200860 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +0300861 *
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200862 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
863 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
864 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
865 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +0300866 * information should then contain::
867 *
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200868 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +0300869 *
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200870 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
871 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200872 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200873struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
874 s8 idx;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100875 u16 count:5,
876 flags:11;
Gustavo F. Padovan3f30fc12010-07-21 10:59:58 +0000877} __packed;
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200878
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100879#define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31
880
881static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
882 u8 mcs, u8 nss)
883{
884 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200885 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
886 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100887}
888
889static inline u8
890ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
891{
892 return rate->idx & 0xF;
893}
894
895static inline u8
896ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
897{
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200898 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100899}
900
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200901/**
902 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200903 *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200904 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
905 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
906 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
907 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
908 *
909 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200910 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200911 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100912 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700913 * @control: union for control data
914 * @status: union for status data
915 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100916 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700917 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100918 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700919 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200920 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200921 */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200922struct ieee80211_tx_info {
923 /* common information */
924 u32 flags;
925 u8 band;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200926
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200927 u8 hw_queue;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100928
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100929 u16 ack_frame_id;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100930
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200931 union {
932 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200933 union {
934 /* rate control */
935 struct {
936 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
937 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
938 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200939 u8 use_rts:1;
940 u8 use_cts_prot:1;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200941 u8 short_preamble:1;
942 u8 skip_table:1;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200943 /* 2 bytes free */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200944 };
945 /* only needed before rate control */
946 unsigned long jiffies;
947 };
Johannes Berg25d834e2008-09-12 22:52:47 +0200948 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
Johannes Berg53168212017-06-22 12:20:30 +0200949 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200950 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200951 u32 flags;
Johannes Berg53168212017-06-22 12:20:30 +0200952 codel_time_t enqueue_time;
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200953 } control;
954 struct {
Johannes Berg3b79af92015-06-01 23:14:59 +0200955 u64 cookie;
956 } ack;
957 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200958 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Eliad Pellera0f995a2014-03-13 14:30:47 +0200959 s32 ack_signal;
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200960 u8 ampdu_ack_len;
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100961 u8 ampdu_len;
Johannes Bergd748b462012-03-28 11:04:23 +0200962 u8 antenna;
Johannes Berg02219b32014-10-07 10:38:50 +0300963 u16 tx_time;
Venkateswara Naralasettya78b26f2018-02-13 11:04:46 +0530964 bool is_valid_ack_signal;
Johannes Berg02219b32014-10-07 10:38:50 +0300965 void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200966 } status;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200967 struct {
968 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
969 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200970 u8 pad[4];
971
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200972 void *rate_driver_data[
973 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
974 };
975 void *driver_data[
976 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200977 };
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700978};
979
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +0300980/**
Felix Fietkau18fb84d2017-04-26 17:11:35 +0200981 * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx staus info for rate control
982 *
983 * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for
984 * @info: Basic tx status information
985 * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver)
986 */
987struct ieee80211_tx_status {
988 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
989 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info;
990 struct sk_buff *skb;
991};
992
993/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200994 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
995 *
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +0200996 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
997 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
998 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200999 *
1000 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
1001 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
1002 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
1003 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
1004 */
1005struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +02001006 const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1007 size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02001008 const u8 *common_ies;
1009 size_t common_ie_len;
1010};
1011
1012
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02001013static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1014{
1015 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
1016}
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001017
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02001018static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1019{
1020 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
1021}
1022
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001023/**
1024 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
1025 *
1026 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
1027 *
1028 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
1029 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
1030 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
1031 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
1032 *
1033 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
1034 * info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
1035 * instead if you need only the less space that allows.
1036 */
1037static inline void
1038ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1039{
1040 int i;
1041
1042 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1043 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
1044 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1045 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
1046 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
1047 /* clear the rate counts */
1048 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
1049 info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
1050
1051 BUILD_BUG_ON(
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +02001052 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001053 memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
1054 sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
1055 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
1056}
1057
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001058
1059/**
1060 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
1061 *
1062 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1063 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
1064 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
1065 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001066 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
1067 * verification has been done by the hardware.
David Spinadelcef0acd2016-11-21 16:58:40 +02001068 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001069 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
1070 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
Johannes Berg981d94a2015-06-12 14:39:02 +02001071 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
1072 * flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
1073 * Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
1074 * is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
Luis de Bethencourt84ea3a182016-03-18 16:09:29 +00001075 * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did
1076 * de-duplication by itself.
Johannes Berg72abd812007-09-17 01:29:22 -04001077 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
1078 * the frame.
1079 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
1080 * the frame.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001081 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
Johannes Berg6ebacbb2011-02-23 15:06:08 +01001082 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
1083 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
1084 * merging.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001085 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1086 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
1087 * (including FCS) was received.
Johannes Bergf4a0f0c2016-01-25 15:46:34 +02001088 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1089 * field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received.
Felix Fietkaufe8431f2012-03-01 18:00:07 +01001090 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
1091 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001092 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
1093 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1094 * each A-MPDU
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001095 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1096 * subframes of a single A-MPDU
1097 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1098 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1099 * on this subframe
1100 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1101 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
Sara Sharonf980ebc2016-02-24 11:49:45 +02001102 * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was
1103 * done by the hardware
Grzegorz Bajorski17883042015-12-11 14:39:46 +01001104 * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without
1105 * processing it in any regular way.
1106 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1107 * them for sniffing purposes.
1108 * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except
1109 * monitor interfaces.
1110 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1111 * them for sniffing purposes.
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +02001112 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1113 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1114 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1115 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1116 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1117 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1118 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1119 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1120 * interleaved with other frames.
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001121 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1122 * radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1123 * the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
Sara Sharonf631a772016-05-03 15:59:44 +03001124 * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before.
1125 * This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as
1126 * the first subframe.
David Spinadelcef0acd2016-11-21 16:58:40 +02001127 * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must
1128 * be done in the hardware.
Johannes Berg7299d6f2018-02-19 14:48:39 +02001129 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this
1130 * frame
1131 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +03001132 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present
1133 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in
1134 * - DATA3_DATA_MCS
1135 * - DATA3_DATA_DCM
1136 * - DATA3_CODING
1137 * - DATA5_GI
1138 * - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC
1139 * - DATA6_NSTS
1140 * - DATA3_STBC
1141 * from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data)
1142 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present
1143 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001144 */
1145enum mac80211_rx_flags {
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001146 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0),
1147 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1),
Johannes Bergf4a0f0c2016-01-25 15:46:34 +02001148 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001149 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3),
1150 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4),
1151 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5),
1152 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001153 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001154 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(8),
1155 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(9),
1156 RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED = BIT(10),
1157 RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED = BIT(11),
1158 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(12),
1159 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(13),
1160 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(14),
1161 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(15),
1162 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(16),
1163 RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR = BIT(17),
1164 RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR = BIT(18),
1165 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(19),
1166 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA = BIT(20),
1167 RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED = BIT(21),
1168 RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN = BIT(22),
1169 RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED = BIT(23),
Johannes Berg7299d6f2018-02-19 14:48:39 +02001170 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT = BIT(24),
1171 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN = BIT(25),
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +03001172 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE = BIT(26),
1173 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU = BIT(27),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001174};
1175
1176/**
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001177 * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001178 *
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001179 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001180 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
1181 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission,
1182 * if the driver fills this value it should add
1183 * %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1184 * to hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact
1185 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
1186 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001187 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001188 */
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001189enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags {
1190 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergda6a4352017-04-26 12:14:59 +02001191 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(2),
1192 RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(3),
1193 RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(4) | BIT(5),
1194 RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(6),
1195 RX_ENC_FLAG_BF = BIT(7),
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001196};
1197
Johannes Bergda6a4352017-04-26 12:14:59 +02001198#define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 4
1199
1200enum mac80211_rx_encoding {
1201 RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0,
1202 RX_ENC_HT,
1203 RX_ENC_VHT,
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +03001204 RX_ENC_HE,
Johannes Bergda6a4352017-04-26 12:14:59 +02001205};
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001206
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001207/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001208 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1209 *
1210 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1211 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02001212 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001213 *
Bruno Randolfc132bec2008-02-18 11:20:51 +09001214 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1215 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
Johannes Berg162dd6a2016-02-23 23:05:06 +02001216 * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is
1217 * needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +02001218 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1219 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001220 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001221 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
Johannes Berg4352a4d2015-12-08 16:04:35 +02001222 * This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed
1223 * for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting.
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001224 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1225 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1226 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +02001227 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1228 * values were filled.
1229 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1230 * support dB or unspecified units)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001231 * @antenna: antenna used
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +02001232 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001233 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
Johannes Berg8613c942017-04-26 13:51:41 +02001234 * @nss: number of streams (VHT and HE only)
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03001235 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\*
Johannes Bergda6a4352017-04-26 12:14:59 +02001236 * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding
1237 * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001238 * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +03001239 * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc
1240 * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi
1241 * @he_dcm: HE DCM value
Johannes Berg554891e2010-09-24 12:38:25 +02001242 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001243 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1244 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1245 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001246 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001247struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1248 u64 mactime;
Johannes Berg162dd6a2016-02-23 23:05:06 +02001249 u64 boottime_ns;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +02001250 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001251 u32 ampdu_reference;
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001252 u32 flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001253 u16 freq;
Johannes Bergda6a4352017-04-26 12:14:59 +02001254 u8 enc_flags;
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +03001255 u8 encoding:2, bw:3, he_ru:3;
1256 u8 he_gi:2, he_dcm:1;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001257 u8 rate_idx;
Johannes Berg8613c942017-04-26 13:51:41 +02001258 u8 nss;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001259 u8 rx_flags;
1260 u8 band;
1261 u8 antenna;
1262 s8 signal;
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +02001263 u8 chains;
1264 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001265 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001266};
1267
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001268/**
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001269 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1270 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1271 * (this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1272 * bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1273 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1274 * alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1275 * description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1276 * Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1277 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1278 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1279 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1280 * then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1281 * @data field.
1282 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1283 * the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1284 * length
1285 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1286 *
1287 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1288 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1289 * data.
1290 */
1291struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1292 u32 present;
1293 u8 align;
1294 u8 oui[3];
1295 u8 subns;
1296 u8 pad;
1297 u16 len;
1298 u8 data[];
1299} __packed;
1300
1301/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001302 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1303 *
1304 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1305 *
Johannes Berg0869aea02009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001306 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1307 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1308 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001309 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1310 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1311 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1312 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1313 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1314 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1315 * for more.
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001316 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1317 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1318 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1319 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1320 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001321 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1322 * operating channel.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001323 */
1324enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
Johannes Berg0869aea02009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001325 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0),
Johannes Bergae5eb022008-10-14 16:58:37 +02001326 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001327 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2),
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001328 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3),
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001329};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001330
Johannes Berg7a5158e2008-10-08 10:59:33 +02001331
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001332/**
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001333 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1334 *
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001335 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
Johannes Berg0869aea02009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001336 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001337 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001338 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
Johannes Berg47979382009-01-07 10:13:27 +01001339 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001340 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001341 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001342 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001343 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1344 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001345 */
1346enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001347 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001348 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0869aea02009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001349 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001350 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4),
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001351 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5),
1352 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6),
1353 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001354 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001355};
1356
1357/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001358 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1359 *
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +02001360 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1361 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1362 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1363 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1364 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001365 */
1366enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1367 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1368 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1369 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1370 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1371
1372 /* keep last */
1373 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1374};
1375
1376/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001377 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1378 *
1379 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1380 *
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001381 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1382 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001383 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001384 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1385 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1386 * has been received and the DTIM period is known.
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001387 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1388 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1389 * the CONF_PS flag is set.
1390 *
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +02001391 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1392 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001393 *
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001394 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001395 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001396 *
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001397 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001398 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1399 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001400 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001401 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1402 * number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001403 *
1404 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1405 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001406 * configured for an HT channel.
1407 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1408 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001409 */
1410struct ieee80211_conf {
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001411 u32 flags;
Juuso Oikarinenff616382010-06-09 09:51:52 +03001412 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +02001413
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001414 u16 listen_interval;
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001415 u8 ps_dtim_period;
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001416
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001417 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1418
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001419 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001420 bool radar_enabled;
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001421 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001422};
1423
1424/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001425 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1426 *
1427 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1428 * operation.
1429 *
1430 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1431 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1432 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1433 * the driver passed into mac80211.
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001434 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1435 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001436 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1437 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001438 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001439 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1440 */
1441struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1442 u64 timestamp;
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001443 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001444 bool block_tx;
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001445 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001446 u8 count;
1447};
1448
1449/**
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001450 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1451 *
1452 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1453 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001454 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1455 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1456 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1457 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001458 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1459 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1460 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1461 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comb115b972015-10-27 08:38:40 +01001462 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes
1463 * and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even
1464 * this is not pure P2P vif.
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001465 */
1466enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1467 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001468 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1),
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001469 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2),
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comb115b972015-10-27 08:38:40 +01001470 IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE = BIT(3),
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001471};
1472
1473/**
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001474 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1475 *
1476 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1477 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1478 *
Johannes Berg51fb61e2007-12-19 01:31:27 +01001479 * @type: type of this virtual interface
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001480 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1481 * or the BSS we're associated to
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001482 * @addr: address of this interface
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001483 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1484 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
Michal Kazior59af6922014-04-09 15:10:59 +02001485 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1486 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1487 * for read access.
Sara Sharonb5a33d52016-02-16 12:48:18 +02001488 * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001489 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1490 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1491 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1492 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001493 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1494 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001495 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1496 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1497 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1498 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1499 * processed after it switches back to %NULL.
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001500 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001501 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001502 * monitor interface (if that is requested.)
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03001503 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
1504 * interface.
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001505 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03001506 * sizeof(void \*).
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001507 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
Manikanta Pubbisetty21a5d4c2018-07-11 00:12:53 +05301508 * @txqs_stopped: per AC flag to indicate that intermediate TXQs are stopped,
1509 * protected by fq->lock.
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001510 */
1511struct ieee80211_vif {
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001512 enum nl80211_iftype type;
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001513 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
Michael Brauna3e2f4b2016-10-15 13:28:19 +02001514 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001515 bool p2p;
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02001516 bool csa_active;
Sara Sharonb5a33d52016-02-16 12:48:18 +02001517 bool mu_mimo_owner;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001518
1519 u8 cab_queue;
1520 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1521
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001522 struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1523
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001524 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1525
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001526 u32 driver_flags;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001527
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001528#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1529 struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1530#endif
1531
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03001532 unsigned int probe_req_reg;
1533
Manikanta Pubbisetty21a5d4c2018-07-11 00:12:53 +05301534 bool txqs_stopped[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1535
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001536 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001537 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001538};
1539
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001540static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1541{
1542#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001543 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001544#endif
1545 return false;
1546}
1547
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001548/**
Johannes Bergad7e7182013-11-13 13:37:47 +01001549 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1550 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1551 *
1552 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1553 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1554 *
1555 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1556 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1557 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1558 */
1559struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1560
1561/**
Emmanuel Grumbachdc5a1ad2015-03-12 08:53:24 +02001562 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1563 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1564 *
1565 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1566 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1567 *
1568 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1569 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1570 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1571 */
1572struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1573
1574/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001575 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1576 *
1577 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1578 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1579 *
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001580 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1581 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001582 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1583 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001584 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1585 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1586 * generation in software.
Ivo van Doornc6adbd22008-04-17 21:11:18 +02001587 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1588 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001589 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02001590 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1591 * (MFP) to be done in software.
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001592 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comee701082012-05-09 08:11:20 +03001593 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001594 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001595 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1596 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1597 * MIC.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001598 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1599 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1600 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1601 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1602 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1603 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1604 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001605 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02001606 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001607 * only for managment frames (MFP).
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001608 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1609 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1610 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
David Spinadel9de18d82017-12-01 13:50:52 +02001611 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for
1612 * a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with
1613 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001614 */
1615enum ieee80211_key_flags {
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001616 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0),
1617 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1),
1618 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2),
1619 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3),
1620 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4),
1621 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5),
1622 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6),
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001623 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7),
David Spinadel9de18d82017-12-01 13:50:52 +02001624 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE = BIT(8),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001625};
1626
1627/**
1628 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1629 *
1630 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1631 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1632 *
1633 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1634 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001635 * encrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001636 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
Eliad Pellerf8079d42016-02-14 13:56:35 +02001637 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it
1638 * needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001639 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1640 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1641 * @keylen: key material length
Luis R. Rodriguezffd78912008-06-21 10:02:46 -04001642 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1643 * data block:
1644 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1645 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1646 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01001647 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1648 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001649 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001650struct ieee80211_key_conf {
Johannes Bergdb388a52015-06-01 15:36:51 +02001651 atomic64_t tx_pn;
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001652 u32 cipher;
Felix Fietkau76708de2008-10-05 18:02:48 +02001653 u8 icv_len;
1654 u8 iv_len;
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001655 u8 hw_key_idx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001656 s8 keyidx;
David Spinadel9de18d82017-12-01 13:50:52 +02001657 u16 flags;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001658 u8 keylen;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001659 u8 key[0];
1660};
1661
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001662#define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN 16
1663
Eliad Pellerf8079d42016-02-14 13:56:35 +02001664#define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff))
1665#define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff))
1666
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001667/**
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001668 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
1669 *
1670 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
1671 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1672 * reverse order than in packet)
1673 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1674 * reverse order than in packet)
1675 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1676 * reverse order than in packet)
1677 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1678 * reverse order than in packet)
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001679 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001680 */
1681struct ieee80211_key_seq {
1682 union {
1683 struct {
1684 u32 iv32;
1685 u16 iv16;
1686 } tkip;
1687 struct {
1688 u8 pn[6];
1689 } ccmp;
1690 struct {
1691 u8 pn[6];
1692 } aes_cmac;
1693 struct {
1694 u8 pn[6];
1695 } aes_gmac;
1696 struct {
1697 u8 pn[6];
1698 } gcmp;
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001699 struct {
1700 u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
1701 u8 seq_len;
1702 } hw;
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001703 };
1704};
1705
1706/**
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001707 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1708 *
1709 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1710 * the secure packet crypto handling.
1711 *
1712 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1713 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1714 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1715 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1716 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1717 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1718 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1719 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1720 * key_idx value calculation:
1721 * (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1722 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1723 */
1724struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1725 u32 cipher;
1726 u16 iftype;
1727 u8 hdr_len;
1728 u8 pn_len;
1729 u8 pn_off;
1730 u8 key_idx_off;
1731 u8 key_idx_mask;
1732 u8 key_idx_shift;
1733 u8 mic_len;
1734};
1735
1736/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001737 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1738 *
1739 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1740 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1741 *
1742 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1743 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1744 */
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001745enum set_key_cmd {
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001746 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001747};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001748
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001749/**
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01001750 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1751 *
1752 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1753 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1754 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1755 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1756 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1757 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1758 */
1759enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1760 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1761 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1762 IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1763 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1764 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1765 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1766};
1767
1768/**
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001769 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1770 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1771 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1772 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1773 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1774 * (including 80+80 MHz)
1775 *
1776 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1777 * correctly, the values must be sorted.
1778 */
1779enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1780 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1781 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1782 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1783 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1784};
1785
1786/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001787 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1788 *
1789 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001790 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001791 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1792 */
1793struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1794 struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1795 struct {
1796 s8 idx;
1797 u8 count;
1798 u8 count_cts;
1799 u8 count_rts;
1800 u16 flags;
1801 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
1802};
1803
1804/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001805 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
1806 *
1807 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
1808 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
1809 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
1810 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
1811 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01001812 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001813 *
1814 * @addr: MAC address
1815 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
Johannes Berg323ce792008-09-11 02:45:11 +02001816 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
Johannes Berg55d942f2013-03-01 13:07:48 +01001817 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1818 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +03001819 * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA
Maxim Altshul480dd462016-08-22 17:14:04 +03001820 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU
1821 * that this station is allowed to transmit to us.
1822 * Can be modified by driver.
Johannes Berg527871d2015-03-21 08:09:55 +01001823 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
1824 * otherwise always false)
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001825 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03001826 * sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information.
Eliad Peller910868d2011-09-11 09:46:55 +03001827 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
Emmanuel Grumbachf438ceb2016-10-18 23:12:12 +03001828 * if wme is supported. The bits order is like in
1829 * IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*.
Eliad Peller910868d2011-09-11 09:46:55 +03001830 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001831 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001832 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
1833 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
1834 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
1835 * the station moves to associated state.
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001836 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001837 * @rates: rate control selection table
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001838 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001839 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
1840 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
Tamizh chelvam93f04902015-10-07 10:40:04 +05301841 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
Emmanuel Grumbach506bcfa2015-12-13 15:41:05 +02001842 * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single
1843 * A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means
1844 * unlimited.
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +02001845 * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not.
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01001846 * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control.
Johannes Bergadf8ed02018-08-31 11:31:08 +03001847 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction); note that
1848 * the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) is used for non-data frames
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001849 */
1850struct ieee80211_sta {
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +02001851 u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001852 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
1853 u16 aid;
Johannes Bergd9fe60d2008-10-09 12:13:49 +02001854 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
Mahesh Palivela818255e2012-10-10 11:33:04 +00001855 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +03001856 struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap;
1857 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
Arik Nemtsov39df6002011-06-27 23:58:45 +03001858 bool wme;
Eliad Peller9533b4a2011-08-23 14:37:47 +03001859 u8 uapsd_queues;
1860 u8 max_sp;
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001861 u8 rx_nss;
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001862 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001863 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001864 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001865 bool tdls;
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001866 bool tdls_initiator;
Tamizh chelvam93f04902015-10-07 10:40:04 +05301867 bool mfp;
Emmanuel Grumbach506bcfa2015-12-13 15:41:05 +02001868 u8 max_amsdu_subframes;
Johannes Berg57eeb202017-01-13 11:12:01 +01001869
1870 /**
1871 * @max_amsdu_len:
1872 * indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes.
1873 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble.
1874 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply:
1875 *
1876 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the
1877 * A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes.
1878 * * If the skb is not part of a BA aggreement, the A-MSDU maximal
1879 * size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes.
1880 *
1881 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level
1882 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section
1883 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2).
1884 */
Emmanuel Grumbach506bcfa2015-12-13 15:41:05 +02001885 u16 max_amsdu_len;
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +02001886 bool support_p2p_ps;
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01001887 u16 max_rc_amsdu_len;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001888
Johannes Bergadf8ed02018-08-31 11:31:08 +03001889 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1];
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001890
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001891 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001892 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001893};
1894
1895/**
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001896 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
1897 *
1898 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
Sujith38a6cc72010-05-19 11:32:30 +05301899 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001900 *
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001901 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
1902 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
1903 */
Christian Lamparter89fad572008-12-09 16:28:06 +01001904enum sta_notify_cmd {
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001905 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
1906};
1907
1908/**
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02001909 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
1910 *
1911 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
1912 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
1913 */
1914struct ieee80211_tx_control {
1915 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1916};
1917
1918/**
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001919 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
1920 *
1921 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
1922 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
Johannes Bergadf8ed02018-08-31 11:31:08 +03001923 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue),
1924 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled)
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001925 * @ac: the AC for this queue
Johannes Bergf8bdbb52015-05-20 15:04:53 +02001926 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001927 *
1928 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
1929 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
1930 */
1931struct ieee80211_txq {
1932 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1933 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1934 u8 tid;
1935 u8 ac;
1936
1937 /* must be last */
1938 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1939};
1940
1941/**
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001942 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
1943 *
1944 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
1945 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
1946 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
1947 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
1948 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
1949 *
Johannes Bergaf65cd962009-11-17 18:18:36 +01001950 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
1951 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
1952 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
1953 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
1954 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
1955 * algorithm.
1956 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
1957 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
1958 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
1959 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
1960 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
1961 * CCK frames.
1962 *
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001963 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
1964 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
1965 * the FCS at the end.
1966 *
1967 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
1968 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
1969 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
1970 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
1971 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
1972 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07001973 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001974 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001975 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
1976 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
1977 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
1978 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
1979 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001980 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
1981 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
1982 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
1983 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
1984 *
Tomas Winkler06ff47b2008-06-18 17:53:44 +03001985 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
1986 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
1987 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
Sujith8b30b1f2008-10-24 09:55:27 +05301988 *
1989 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
1990 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
Kalle Valo520eb822008-12-18 23:35:27 +02001991 *
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001992 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
1993 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
1994 *
1995 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
1996 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
1997 * stack support for dynamic PS.
1998 *
1999 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
2000 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
Jouni Malinen4375d082009-01-08 13:32:11 +02002001 *
2002 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
2003 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002004 *
Vivek Natarajan375177b2010-02-09 14:50:28 +05302005 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
2006 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
2007 * the stack.
2008 *
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02002009 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02002010 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
2011 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02002012 *
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +02002013 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
2014 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
2015 * dtim_period).
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02002016 *
2017 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
2018 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
2019 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
2020 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
2021 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
2022 * only in that case.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02002023 *
2024 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
2025 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
2026 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
2027 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
2028 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
2029 * the PS mode of connected stations.
Arik Nemtsovedf6b782011-08-30 09:32:38 +03002030 *
2031 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
2032 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
2033 * software.
Eliad Peller885bd8e2012-02-02 17:44:55 +02002034 *
Johannes Berg4b6f1dd2012-04-03 14:35:57 +02002035 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
2036 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
2037 * active interfaces.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002038 *
Ben Greeare27513f2014-10-22 12:23:03 -07002039 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
2040 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as
2041 * desired (and thus have them named as desired).
2042 *
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01002043 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
2044 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
2045 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
2046 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
2047 * supported cipher suites.
2048 *
Johannes Berg17c18bf2015-03-21 15:25:43 +01002049 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
2050 * this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
2051 * for frames.
2052 *
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002053 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
2054 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
2055 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
2056 * control for more details.
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02002057 *
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02002058 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
2059 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
2060 *
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02002061 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
2062 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
2063 * is supported.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +01002064 *
2065 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
2066 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03002067 *
Johannes Berg919be622013-10-14 10:05:16 +02002068 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
2069 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
2070 * using aggregation for such frames.)
2071 *
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03002072 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
2073 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
2074 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
2075 * CSA frame.
Luciano Coelho5d52ee82014-02-27 14:33:47 +02002076 *
Ido Yarivc70f59a2014-07-29 15:39:14 +03002077 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
2078 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
2079 *
Johannes Bergc526a462015-06-02 20:32:00 +02002080 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02002081 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002082 *
Arik Nemtsovb98fb442015-06-10 20:42:59 +03002083 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
2084 * than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
2085 *
Emmanuel Grumbach99e7ca42015-08-15 22:39:51 +03002086 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
2087 * within A-MPDU.
2088 *
Helmut Schaa35afa582015-09-09 09:46:32 +02002089 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
2090 * for sent beacons.
2091 *
Johannes Berg31104892015-10-22 17:35:19 +02002092 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
2093 * station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
2094 * by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
2095 * from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
2096 *
Sara Sharon412a6d82015-12-08 19:09:05 +02002097 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the
2098 * reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in
2099 * order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session
2100 * timeout.
2101 *
Johannes Bergc9c59622016-03-31 20:02:11 +03002102 * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX,
2103 * which implies using per-CPU station statistics.
2104 *
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002105 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated
2106 * A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support.
2107 * When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must
2108 * limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting
2109 * max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta.
2110 *
2111 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list
2112 * skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU.
2113 *
Rajkumar Manoharane8a24cd2016-09-14 12:48:32 +05302114 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event
2115 * by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such
2116 * drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver
2117 * is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout.
2118 *
Sara Sharonf3fe4e92016-10-18 23:12:11 +03002119 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself.
2120 * The stack will not do fragmentation.
2121 * The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well.
2122 *
Yingying Tange2fb1b82017-10-24 16:51:10 +08002123 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on
2124 * TDLS links.
2125 *
Ilan Peer94ba9272018-02-19 14:48:41 +02002126 * @IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP: The driver requires the
2127 * mgd_prepare_tx() callback to be called before transmission of a
2128 * deauthentication frame in case the association was completed but no
2129 * beacon was heard. This is required in multi-channel scenarios, where the
2130 * virtual interface might not be given air time for the transmission of
2131 * the frame, as it is not synced with the AP/P2P GO yet, and thus the
2132 * deauthentication frame might not be transmitted.
Randy Dunlapd1361b32018-04-26 18:17:31 -07002133 *
Ben Caradoc-Davies7c181f42018-03-19 12:57:44 +13002134 * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't
2135 * support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug.
Ilan Peer94ba9272018-02-19 14:48:41 +02002136 *
Johannes Bergadf8ed02018-08-31 11:31:08 +03002137 * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of
2138 * course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with.
2139 *
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002140 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04002141 */
2142enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002143 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
2144 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
2145 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
2146 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
2147 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
2148 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
2149 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
2150 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
2151 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
2152 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
2153 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
2154 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
2155 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
2156 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
2157 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
2158 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
2159 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
2160 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
2161 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
2162 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
2163 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
2164 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
2165 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
2166 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
2167 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
2168 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
2169 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
2170 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
2171 IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
Arik Nemtsovb98fb442015-06-10 20:42:59 +03002172 IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
Emmanuel Grumbach99e7ca42015-08-15 22:39:51 +03002173 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
Helmut Schaa35afa582015-09-09 09:46:32 +02002174 IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
Johannes Berg31104892015-10-22 17:35:19 +02002175 IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
Sara Sharon412a6d82015-12-08 19:09:05 +02002176 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER,
Johannes Bergc9c59622016-03-31 20:02:11 +03002177 IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS,
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002178 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU,
2179 IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST,
Rajkumar Manoharane8a24cd2016-09-14 12:48:32 +05302180 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK,
Sara Sharonf3fe4e92016-10-18 23:12:11 +03002181 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG,
Yingying Tange2fb1b82017-10-24 16:51:10 +08002182 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA,
Ilan Peer94ba9272018-02-19 14:48:41 +02002183 IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP,
Ben Caradoc-Davies7c181f42018-03-19 12:57:44 +13002184 IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP,
Johannes Bergadf8ed02018-08-31 11:31:08 +03002185 IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ,
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002186
2187 /* keep last, obviously */
2188 NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04002189};
2190
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04002191/**
2192 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002193 *
2194 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
2195 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
2196 *
2197 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
2198 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
2199 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01002200 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
2201 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002202 *
2203 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
2204 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002205 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
2206 * along with this structure.
2207 *
2208 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
2209 *
2210 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
2211 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
2212 *
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01002213 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
2214 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002215 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02002216 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02002217 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002218 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002219 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02002220 * that HW supports
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002221 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002222 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +02002223 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
2224 * queues need to have configurable access parameters.
2225 *
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01002226 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
2227 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
2228 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01002229 *
2230 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2231 * within &struct ieee80211_vif.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002232 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2233 * within &struct ieee80211_sta.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02002234 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2235 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01002236 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2237 * within @struct ieee80211_txq.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02002238 *
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02002239 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
2240 * can handle.
2241 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
2242 * the hw can report back.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002243 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04002244 *
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02002245 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
2246 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
2247 * aggregation.
2248 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
2249 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
2250 * it shouldn't be set.
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01002251 *
2252 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +03002253 * aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll
2254 * advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if
2255 * the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N
2256 * with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012).
2257 * For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002258 *
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002259 * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum
2260 * of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list.
2261 *
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002262 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
2263 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002264 *
2265 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2266 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03002267 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002268 * adding _BW is supported today.
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002269 *
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002270 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2271 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03002272 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values.
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002273 *
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +03002274 * @radiotap_he: HE radiotap validity flags
2275 *
Johannes Berg99ee7ca2016-08-29 23:25:17 +03002276 * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the
2277 * 'units_pos' member is set to a non-negative value it must be set to
2278 * a combination of a IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a
2279 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value, and then the timestamp
2280 * field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status
2281 * device_timestamp. If the 'accuracy' member is non-negative, it's put
2282 * into the accuracy radiotap field and the accuracy known flag is set.
2283 *
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002284 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
Johannes Berg680a0da2015-04-13 16:58:25 +02002285 * from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2286 * other features will be rejected during HW registration.
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02002287 *
2288 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2289 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2290 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2291 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2292 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2293 * neither enabled.
2294 *
2295 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2296 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2297 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02002298 *
2299 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
2300 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
2301 * supported by HW.
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03002302 * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the
2303 * device.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04002304 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002305struct ieee80211_hw {
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002306 struct ieee80211_conf conf;
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002307 struct wiphy *wiphy;
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01002308 const char *rate_control_algorithm;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002309 void *priv;
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002310 unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002311 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01002312 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01002313 int vif_data_size;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002314 int sta_data_size;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02002315 int chanctx_data_size;
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01002316 int txq_data_size;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002317 u16 queues;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002318 u16 max_listen_interval;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002319 s8 max_signal;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002320 u8 max_rates;
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02002321 u8 max_report_rates;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002322 u8 max_rate_tries;
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +03002323 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2324 u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002325 u8 max_tx_fragments;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002326 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002327 u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002328 u16 radiotap_vht_details;
Johannes Berg99ee7ca2016-08-29 23:25:17 +03002329 struct {
2330 int units_pos;
2331 s16 accuracy;
2332 } radiotap_timestamp;
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002333 netdev_features_t netdev_features;
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02002334 u8 uapsd_queues;
2335 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02002336 u8 n_cipher_schemes;
2337 const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03002338 u8 max_nan_de_entries;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002339};
2340
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002341static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2342 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2343{
2344 return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2345}
2346#define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2347
2348static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2349 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2350{
2351 return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2352}
2353#define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2354
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002355/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02002356 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2357 *
2358 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2359 * @req: cfg80211 request.
2360 */
2361struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2362 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2363
2364 /* Keep last */
2365 struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2366};
2367
2368/**
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02002369 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2370 *
2371 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2372 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2373 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2374 * @status: channel-switch response status
2375 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2376 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2377 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2378 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2379 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2380 */
2381struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2382 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2383 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2384 u8 action_code;
2385 u32 status;
2386 u32 timestamp;
2387 u16 switch_time;
2388 u16 switch_timeout;
2389 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2390 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2391};
2392
2393/**
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08002394 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2395 *
2396 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2397 *
2398 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2399 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2400 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2401 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2402 * is already used internally by mac80211.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01002403 *
2404 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08002405 */
2406struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2407
2408/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002409 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2410 *
2411 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2412 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2413 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002414static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2415{
2416 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2417}
2418
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002419/**
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002420 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002421 *
2422 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2423 * @addr: the address to set
2424 */
Bjorn Andersson538dc902015-12-24 00:33:26 -08002425static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002426{
2427 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2428}
2429
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002430static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2431ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002432 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002433{
Larry Fingeraa331df2012-04-06 16:35:53 -05002434 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002435 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002436 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002437}
2438
2439static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2440ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002441 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002442{
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002443 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002444 return NULL;
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002445 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002446}
2447
2448static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2449ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02002450 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002451{
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002452 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002453 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002454 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002455}
2456
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002457/**
Johannes Berg6096de72011-11-04 11:18:10 +01002458 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2459 * @hw: the hardware
2460 * @skb: the skb
2461 *
2462 * Free a transmit skb. Use this funtion when some failure
2463 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2464 */
2465void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2466
2467/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002468 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002469 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002470 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2471 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2472 *
2473 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2474 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01002475 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2476 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2477 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002478 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2479 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2480 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002481 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2482 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2483 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2484 *
2485 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2486 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2487 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2488 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2489 *
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01002490 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2491 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2492 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2493 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2494 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002495 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2496 *
2497 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2498 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2499 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2500 * based on the receive flags.
2501 *
2502 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2503 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2504 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2505 * keys.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002506 *
2507 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2508 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2509 * handler.
2510 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
Lucas De Marchi25985ed2011-03-30 22:57:33 -03002511 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002512 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
2513 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002514 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002515 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03002516 *
2517 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
2518 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
2519 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002520 */
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002521
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002522/**
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002523 * DOC: Powersave support
2524 *
2525 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
2526 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002527 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
2528 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
2529 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
2530 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
2531 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
2532 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
2533 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
2534 * it finds traffic directed to it.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002535 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002536 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
2537 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
2538 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04002539 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
2540 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002541 *
2542 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
2543 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2544 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002545 *
2546 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2547 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2548 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2549 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002550 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2551 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002552 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002553 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002554 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2555 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2556 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2557 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2558 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2559 * periods.
2560 *
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04002561 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002562 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2563 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2564 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2565 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2566 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2567 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2568 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2569 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2570 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2571 *
2572 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01002573 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002574 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002575 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2576 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2577 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2578 *
2579 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2580 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002581 */
2582
2583/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002584 * DOC: Beacon filter support
2585 *
2586 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
Justin P. Mattock42b2aa82011-11-28 20:31:00 -08002587 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002588 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2589 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2590 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2591 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2592 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2593 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01002594 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2595 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002596 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2597 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2598 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2599 *
2600 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2601 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2602 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2603 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2604 *
2605 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2606 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2607 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2608 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03002609 *
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002610 * - a list of information element IDs
2611 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2612 *
2613 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2614 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2615 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2616 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2617 * vendor information elements.
2618 *
2619 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2620 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2621 *
2622 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2623 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2624 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2625 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2626 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2627 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2628 *
2629 *
2630 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2631 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2632 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2633 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2634 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2635 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2636 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2637 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2638 *
2639 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2640 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2641 * signal strength threshold checking.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002642 */
2643
2644/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01002645 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2646 *
2647 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2648 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2649 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2650 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2651 *
2652 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2653 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2654 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2655 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2656 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2657 * hardware flags.
2658 *
2659 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2660 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2661 * turned off otherwise.
2662 *
2663 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2664 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2665 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2666 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2667 */
2668
2669/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002670 * DOC: Frame filtering
2671 *
2672 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2673 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2674 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2675 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2676 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2677 *
2678 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2679 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2680 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2681 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002682 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2683 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2684 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2685 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2686 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2687 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2688 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002689 *
2690 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2691 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2692 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2693 * or dropped.
2694 *
Michael Bueschd0f5afb2008-02-12 20:12:45 +01002695 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2696 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2697 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2698 * the flag, but not clear it.
2699 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2700 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2701 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2702 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
2703 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
2704 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
2705 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
2706 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002707 */
2708
2709/**
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002710 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
2711 *
2712 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
2713 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
2714 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
2715 *
2716 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
2717 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
2718 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
2719 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
2720 * the driver code.
2721 *
2722 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
2723 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
2724 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
2725 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
2726 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
2727 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
2728 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
2729 *
2730 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
2731 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
2732 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
2733 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
2734 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
2735 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
2736 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
2737 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
2738 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
2739 * @sta_notify callback.
2740 *
2741 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
2742 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
2743 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
2744 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
2745 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
2746 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
2747 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002748 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002749 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
2750 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
2751 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
2752 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
2753 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
2754 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
2755 *
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002756 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
2757 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
2758 *
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002759 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
2760 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
2761 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
2762 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
2763 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
2764 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
2765 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
2766 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
2767 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
2768 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
2769 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
2770 *
2771 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
2772 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
2773 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
2774 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
2775 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
2776 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
2777 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
2778 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
2779 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
2780 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002781 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002782 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
2783 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
2784 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
2785 *
2786 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
2787 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
2788 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
2789 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
2790 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002791 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002792 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
2793 *
2794 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
2795 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
2796 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
2797 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002798 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
Johannes Bergb77cf4f2014-01-09 00:00:38 +01002799 *
2800 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
2801 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
2802 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
2803 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002804 */
2805
2806/**
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002807 * DOC: HW queue control
2808 *
2809 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
2810 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
2811 * was problematic for a few reasons:
2812 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
2813 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
2814 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
2815 *
2816 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
2817 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
2818 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
2819 *
2820 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
2821 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
2822 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
2823 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
2824 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
2825 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
2826 * the hardware queue.
2827 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
2828 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
2829 *
2830 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
2831 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
2832 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
2833 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
2834 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
2835 *
2836 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
2837 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
2838 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8
2839 * off-channel queue: 9
2840 *
2841 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
2842 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
2843 *
2844 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
2845 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
2846 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
2847 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
2848 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
2849 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2850 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
2851 *
2852 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
2853 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
2854 *
2855 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2856 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
2857 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
2858 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
2859 */
2860
2861/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002862 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
2863 *
2864 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
2865 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
2866 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
2867 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
2868 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002869 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
2870 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
2871 * multicast address.
2872 *
2873 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
2874 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
2875 *
2876 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
2877 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
2878 *
2879 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
2880 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
2881 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
2882 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
2883 * honour this flag if possible.
2884 *
Johannes Bergdf140462015-04-22 14:40:58 +02002885 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
2886 * station
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002887 *
2888 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002889 *
Jakub Kicinskic2d39552015-06-02 21:10:13 +02002890 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002891 *
2892 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002893 */
2894enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002895 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1,
2896 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2,
2897 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3,
2898 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4,
2899 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5,
2900 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6,
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002901 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7,
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002902 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8,
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002903};
2904
2905/**
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002906 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
2907 *
2908 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
2909 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002910 *
2911 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
2912 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02002913 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002914 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
2915 *
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002916 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
2917 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
2918 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002919 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002920 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
2921 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
2922 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
2923 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
2924 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
2925 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
2926 * session is gone and removes the station.
2927 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
2928 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
2929 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
2930 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002931 */
2932enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
2933 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
2934 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02002935 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002936 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
2937 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
2938 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002939 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002940};
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002941
2942/**
Sara Sharon50ea05e2015-12-30 16:06:04 +02002943 * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters
2944 *
2945 * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
2946 * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session
2947 * @tid: tid of the BA session
2948 * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When
2949 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the
2950 * actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here.
2951 * @buf_size: reorder buffer size (number of subframes). Valid only when the
2952 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or
2953 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
2954 * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
2955 * valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
2956 * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to
2957 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START
2958 */
2959struct ieee80211_ampdu_params {
2960 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action;
2961 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2962 u16 tid;
2963 u16 ssn;
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +03002964 u16 buf_size;
Sara Sharon50ea05e2015-12-30 16:06:04 +02002965 bool amsdu;
2966 u16 timeout;
2967};
2968
2969/**
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002970 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
2971 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002972 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
2973 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002974 */
2975enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
2976 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002977 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002978};
2979
2980/**
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002981 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
2982 *
2983 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01002984 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
2985 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
2986 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002987 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002988 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
2989 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
2990 * the peer.
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002991 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
2992 * by the peer
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002993 */
2994enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
2995 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0),
2996 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1),
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002997 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002998 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3),
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002999};
3000
3001/**
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02003002 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
3003 *
3004 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
3005 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
3006 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vise versa).
3007 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
3008 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
3009 *
3010 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
3011 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
3012 * for sending managment frames offchannel.
3013 */
3014enum ieee80211_roc_type {
3015 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
3016 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
3017};
3018
3019/**
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003020 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_complete_type - reconfig type
3021 *
3022 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
3023 * reconfiguration type was completed.
3024 *
3025 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
3026 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1)
3027 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
3028 * of wowlan configuration)
3029 */
3030enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
3031 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
3032 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
3033};
3034
3035/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003036 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
3037 *
3038 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
3039 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
3040 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
3041 *
3042 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
3043 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
3044 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
Johannes Bergeefce912008-05-17 00:57:13 +02003045 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01003046 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01003047 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003048 *
3049 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
3050 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
3051 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
3052 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
3053 * or zero.
3054 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
3055 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
3056 * is added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003057 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003058 *
3059 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
3060 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
3061 * it must turn off frame reception.)
3062 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04003063 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
3064 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003065 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003066 *
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003067 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
3068 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
3069 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
3070 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
3071 * reconfigured at resume time.
Johannes Berg2b4562d2011-07-02 00:02:01 +02003072 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
3073 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
3074 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
3075 * must return 1 from this function.
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003076 *
3077 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
3078 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
3079 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
3080 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
3081 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
3082 *
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02003083 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
3084 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
3085 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
3086 * in suspend().
3087 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003088 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04003089 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003090 * and @stop must be implemented.
3091 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
3092 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
3093 * interface is given in the conf parameter.
3094 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
3095 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003096 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003097 *
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02003098 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
3099 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
3100 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
3101 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
3102 * found by the interface iteration callbacks.
3103 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003104 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
3105 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
3106 * and no monitor interfaces are present.
3107 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
3108 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
3109 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
3110 * MAC address of the device going away.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003111 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003112 *
3113 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
3114 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003115 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003116 * if it does. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003117 *
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01003118 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
3119 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
3120 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
3121 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
3122 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003123 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
3124 * can sleep.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01003125 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003126 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
3127 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
3128 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
3129 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003130 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
3131 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003132 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003133 *
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03003134 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
3135 * This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
3136 * should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
3137 * of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
3138 * which flags are changed.
3139 * This callback can sleep.
3140 *
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07003141 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003142 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003143 *
3144 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003145 * This callback is only called between add_interface and
3146 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01003147 * is enabled.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003148 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003149 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003150 *
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003151 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3152 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
3153 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
Kalle Valoeb807fb2010-01-24 14:55:12 +02003154 * The callback must be atomic.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003155 *
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02003156 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
3157 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
3158 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
3159 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
3160 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
3161 *
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03003162 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
3163 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
3164 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
3165 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003166 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01003167 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
Kalle Valo9050bdd2009-03-22 21:57:21 +02003168 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
3169 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
Johannes Bergde95a542009-04-01 11:58:36 +02003170 * that power save is disabled.
3171 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
3172 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
3173 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
3174 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
3175 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
3176 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
3177 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003178 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003179 *
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03003180 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
3181 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
3182 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
3183 * ieee80211_scan_completed().
3184 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
3185 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
3186 * The callback can sleep.
3187 *
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003188 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
3189 * specific intervals. The driver must call the
3190 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
3191 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
3192 *
3193 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01003194 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003195 *
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01003196 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
3197 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02003198 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
3199 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
3200 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01003201 *
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003202 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
3203 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
3204 * this notification.
3205 * The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01003206 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003207 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
3208 * Returns zero if statistics are available.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003209 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003210 *
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02003211 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
3212 * IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
3213 * IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003214 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003215 *
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02003216 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
Sara Sharonf3fe4e92016-10-18 23:12:11 +03003217 * if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the
3218 * stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG
3219 * should be set as well.
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02003220 * The callback can sleep.
3221 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003222 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003223 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003224 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003225 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
3226 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
3227 *
3228 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003229 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
3230 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
3231 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
3232 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3233 * This callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003234 *
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303235 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
3236 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
Johannes Bergc7e9dbc2016-09-14 10:03:00 +02003237 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This
3238 * callback can sleep.
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303239 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003240 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003241 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
3242 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
3243 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01003244 *
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003245 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
3246 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
3247 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
3248 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003249 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
3250 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
3251 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
3252 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3253 * The callback can sleep.
3254 *
3255 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
3256 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
3257 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
3258 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
3259 * in @sta_state.
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003260 * The callback can sleep.
3261 *
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003262 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
3263 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
3264 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
3265 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
3266 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
3267 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
3268 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01003269 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
3270 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
3271 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003272 *
Johannes Berg2b9a7e12014-11-17 11:35:23 +01003273 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
3274 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
3275 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
3276 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
3277 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
3278 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
3279 * The callback can sleep.
3280 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003281 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
Johannes Bergfe3fa822008-09-08 11:05:09 +02003282 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003283 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003284 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003285 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003286 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01003287 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01003288 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003289 * The callback can sleep.
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01003290 *
3291 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02003292 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01003293 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003294 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003295 *
Pedersen, Thomas354d3812016-09-28 16:56:28 -07003296 * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the
3297 * firmware/hardware. Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between
3298 * calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up
3299 * as TSF delay. Is not a required function.
3300 * The callback can sleep.
3301 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003302 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
3303 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
3304 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
3305 * TSF synchronization.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003306 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003307 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003308 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
3309 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
3310 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003311 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003312 * The callback can sleep.
Ron Rindjunskyd3c990f2007-11-26 16:14:34 +02003313 *
Randy Dunlap4e8998f2010-05-21 11:28:33 -07003314 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3315 *
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003316 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3317 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3318 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003319 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003320 *
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01003321 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3322 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02003323 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3324 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3325 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01003326 *
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03003327 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3328 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07003329 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berga80f7c02009-12-23 13:15:32 +01003330 *
3331 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01003332 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3333 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3334 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3335 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02003336 * Note that vif can be NULL.
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01003337 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003338 *
3339 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
3340 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
3341 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
3342 * completion of the channel switch.
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003343 *
Bruno Randolf79b1c462010-11-24 14:34:41 +09003344 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
3345 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
3346 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
3347 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
3348 *
3349 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01003350 *
3351 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3352 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3353 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3354 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3355 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3356 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02003357 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02003358 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3359 * must be accepted in this case.
3360 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01003361 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3362 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05003363 *
3364 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3365 *
3366 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05303367 *
3368 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3369 * queues before entering power save.
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05303370 *
3371 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3372 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3373 * The callback can sleep.
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +02003374 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3375 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +03003376 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003377 *
3378 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3379 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3380 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3381 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09003382 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003383 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3384 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3385 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3386 * more-data bit must always be set.
3387 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3388 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
Johannes Bergdeeaee192011-09-29 16:04:35 +02003389 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3390 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3391 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3392 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3393 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3394 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003395 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3396 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3397 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02003398 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3399 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02003400 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01003401 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003402 * This callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003403 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3404 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3405 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01003406 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003407 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3408 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3409 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3410 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02003411 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01003412 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003413 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3414 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3415 * This callback must be atomic.
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07003416 *
3417 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3418 *
3419 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3420 *
3421 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3422 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3423 *
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003424 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3425 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3426 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3427 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3428 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3429 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3430 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3431 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3432 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
Ilan Peer94ba9272018-02-19 14:48:41 +02003433 * For drivers that set %IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, mac80211
3434 * would also call this function before transmitting a deauthentication
3435 * frame in case that no beacon was heard from the AP/P2P GO.
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003436 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
3437 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
Ilan Peerd4e36e52018-04-20 13:49:25 +03003438 * If duration is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the driver the
3439 * duration for which the operation is requested.
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003440 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003441 *
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03003442 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
3443 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
3444 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
3445 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
3446 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
3447 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
3448 * 2 * (DTIM period).
3449 * The callback is optional and can sleep.
3450 *
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003451 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303452 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003453 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303454 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003455 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
3456 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
3457 * channel context with different settings
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303458 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003459 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
3460 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303461 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003462 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
3463 * unbound from vif.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303464 * This callback may sleep.
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003465 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
3466 * another, as specified in the list of
3467 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
3468 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303469 * This callback may sleep.
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003470 *
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02003471 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
3472 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
3473 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
3474 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
3475 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
3476 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
3477 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01003478 *
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003479 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
3480 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
3481 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
3482 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
3483 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg8f21b0a2013-01-11 00:28:01 +01003484 *
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01003485 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
3486 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
3487 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003488 *
3489 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
3490 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
3491 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003492 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003493 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
3494 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003495 * 1 using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003496 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003497 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
3498 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003499 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3500 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
Masahiro Yamada9332ef92017-02-27 14:28:47 -08003501 * gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003502 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03003503 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3504 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
3505 * driver to go back to a normal configuration.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003506 *
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003507 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
3508 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
3509 * channel context is bound before this is called.
3510 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02003511 *
3512 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
3513 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
3514 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02003515 *
3516 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
3517 * and hardware limits.
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003518 *
3519 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
3520 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
3521 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
3522 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
3523 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
3524 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
3525 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
3526 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
3527 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003528 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
3529 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
3530 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
3531 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
3532 * response template is provided, together with the location of the
3533 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
3534 * the function call.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01003535 *
3536 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
Sara Sharonf59374e2016-03-02 23:46:14 +02003537 * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a
3538 * synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues
3539 * pending frames that were received prior to the control path action
3540 * currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet.
Ayala Beker708d50e2016-09-20 17:31:14 +03003541 *
3542 * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one.
3543 * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster.
Ayala Beker5953ff62016-09-20 17:31:19 +03003544 * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf
3545 * contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters
3546 * are changed with respect to the last NAN config.
3547 * The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since
3548 * some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the
3549 * changed parameters.
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03003550 * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in
3551 * cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of
3552 * this call.
3553 * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call
3554 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with
3555 * NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003556 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003557struct ieee80211_ops {
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02003558 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3559 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
3560 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003561 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003562 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003563#ifdef CONFIG_PM
3564 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
3565 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg6d525632012-04-04 15:05:25 +02003566 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003567#endif
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003568 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003569 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02003570 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3571 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02003572 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003573 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003574 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02003575 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01003576 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3577 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3578 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
3579 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergb2abb6e2011-07-19 10:39:53 +02003580
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02003581 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3582 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3583
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003584 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Jiri Pirko22bedad32010-04-01 21:22:57 +00003585 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003586 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3587 unsigned int changed_flags,
3588 unsigned int *total_flags,
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003589 u64 multicast);
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03003590 void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3591 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3592 unsigned int filter_flags,
3593 unsigned int changed_flags);
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003594 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3595 bool set);
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04003596 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01003597 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04003598 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003599 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergb3fbdcf2010-01-21 11:40:47 +01003600 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3601 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
3602 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3603 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02003604 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3605 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3606 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03003607 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3608 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
Johannes Berga060bbf2010-04-27 11:59:34 +02003609 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02003610 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03003611 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3612 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003613 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3614 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3615 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +02003616 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01003617 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003618 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02003619 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3620 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3621 const u8 *mac_addr);
3622 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3623 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003624 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3625 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02003626 void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3627 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
3628 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02003629 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003630 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003631 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3632 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3633 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3634 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303635#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
3636 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3637 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3638 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3639 struct dentry *dir);
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303640#endif
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003641 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003642 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003643 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3644 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3645 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
3646 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003647 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3648 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3649 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003650 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3651 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3652 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3653 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01003654 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3655 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3656 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg2b9a7e12014-11-17 11:35:23 +01003657 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3658 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3659 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3660 struct station_info *sinfo);
Eliad Peller8a3a3c82011-10-02 10:15:52 +02003661 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga3304b02012-03-28 11:04:24 +02003662 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003663 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
Eliad Peller37a41b42011-09-21 14:06:11 +03003664 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3665 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3666 u64 tsf);
Pedersen, Thomas354d3812016-09-28 16:56:28 -07003667 void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3668 s64 offset);
Eliad Peller37a41b42011-09-21 14:06:11 +03003669 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003670 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg57eeb202017-01-13 11:12:01 +01003671
3672 /**
3673 * @ampdu_action:
3674 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action.
3675 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
3676 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
3677 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3678 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver
3679 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size
3680 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
3681 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
3682 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
3683 *
3684 * - ``TX: 1.....7``
3685 * - ``RX: 2....7`` (lost frame #1)
3686 * - ``TX: 8..1...``
3687 *
3688 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
3689 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
3690 *
3691 * - ``TX: 1 or``
3692 * - ``TX: 18 or``
3693 * - ``TX: 81``
3694 *
3695 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
3696 *
3697 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
3698 * The callback can sleep.
3699 */
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02003700 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01003701 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Sara Sharon50ea05e2015-12-30 16:06:04 +02003702 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params);
Holger Schurig12897232010-04-19 10:23:57 +02003703 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
3704 struct survey_info *survey);
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003705 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02003706 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003707#ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03003708 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3709 void *data, int len);
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07003710 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
3711 struct netlink_callback *cb,
3712 void *data, int len);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003713#endif
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02003714 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3715 u32 queues, bool drop);
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003716 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho0f791eb42014-10-08 09:48:40 +03003717 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003718 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Bruno Randolf15d96752010-11-10 12:50:56 +09003719 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
3720 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003721
3722 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Eliad Peller49884562012-11-19 17:05:09 +02003723 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003724 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02003725 int duration,
3726 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003727 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05003728 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
3729 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3730 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05303731 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05303732 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3733 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +02003734 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3735 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3736 const struct ieee80211_event *event);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003737
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003738 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3739 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3740 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3741 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3742 bool more_data);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003743 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3744 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3745 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3746 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3747 bool more_data);
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07003748
3749 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3750 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
3751 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3752 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3753 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
3754 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3755 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3756 u32 sset, u8 *data);
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003757
3758 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Ilan Peerd4e36e52018-04-20 13:49:25 +03003759 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3760 u16 duration);
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003761
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03003762 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3763 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3764
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003765 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3766 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3767 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3768 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3769 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3770 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
3771 u32 changed);
3772 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3773 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3774 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3775 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3776 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3777 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003778 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3779 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
3780 int n_vifs,
3781 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01003782
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003783 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3784 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01003785
3786#if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
3787 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3788 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3789 struct inet6_dev *idev);
3790#endif
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003791 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3792 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3793 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003794 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3795 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3796 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003797
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03003798 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3799 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3800
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003801 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3802 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Maxim Altshul2439ca02016-08-04 15:43:04 +03003803 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3804 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02003805 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3806 int *dbm);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003807
3808 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3809 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3810 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
3811 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003812 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003813 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3814 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3815 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003816 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3817 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3818 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01003819
Johannes Berge7881bd52017-12-19 10:11:54 +01003820 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3821 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
Sara Sharonf59374e2016-03-02 23:46:14 +02003822 void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Ayala Beker708d50e2016-09-20 17:31:14 +03003823
3824 int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3825 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3826 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf);
3827 int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3828 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Ayala Beker5953ff62016-09-20 17:31:19 +03003829 int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3830 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3831 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes);
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03003832 int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3833 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3834 const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func);
3835 void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3836 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3837 u8 instance_id);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003838};
3839
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003840/**
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003841 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
3842 *
3843 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3844 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3845 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3846 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3847 * @priv_data_len.
3848 *
3849 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3850 * @ops: callbacks for this device
3851 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
3852 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
3853 *
3854 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
3855 */
3856struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
3857 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
3858 const char *requested_name);
3859
3860/**
3861 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003862 *
3863 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3864 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3865 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3866 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3867 * @priv_data_len.
3868 *
3869 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3870 * @ops: callbacks for this device
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003871 *
3872 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003873 */
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003874static inline
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003875struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003876 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
3877{
3878 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
3879}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003880
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003881/**
3882 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
3883 *
Johannes Bergdbbea672008-02-26 14:34:06 +01003884 * You must call this function before any other functions in
3885 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
3886 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003887 *
3888 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003889 *
3890 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003891 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003892int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3893
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003894/**
3895 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
3896 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
3897 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
3898 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
3899 */
3900struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
3901 int throughput;
3902 int blink_time;
3903};
3904
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003905/**
3906 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
3907 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
3908 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
3909 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
3910 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
3911 */
3912enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
3913 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0),
3914 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1),
3915 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2),
3916};
3917
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003918#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003919const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3920const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3921const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3922const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3923const char *
3924__ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3925 unsigned int flags,
3926 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3927 unsigned int blink_table_len);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003928#endif
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003929/**
3930 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
3931 *
3932 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3933 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3934 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3935 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3936 *
3937 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003938 *
3939 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003940 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003941static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003942{
3943#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3944 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
3945#else
3946 return NULL;
3947#endif
3948}
3949
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003950/**
3951 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
3952 *
3953 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3954 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3955 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3956 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3957 *
3958 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003959 *
3960 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003961 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003962static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003963{
3964#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3965 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
3966#else
3967 return NULL;
3968#endif
3969}
3970
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003971/**
3972 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
3973 *
3974 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3975 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3976 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3977 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3978 *
3979 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003980 *
3981 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003982 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003983static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003984{
3985#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3986 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
3987#else
3988 return NULL;
3989#endif
3990}
3991
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003992/**
3993 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
3994 *
3995 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3996 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3997 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3998 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3999 *
4000 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004001 *
4002 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01004003 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02004004static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01004005{
4006#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4007 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
4008#else
4009 return NULL;
4010#endif
4011}
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02004012
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004013/**
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01004014 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
4015 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01004016 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01004017 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
4018 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
4019 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004020 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
4021 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
4022 *
4023 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01004024 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02004025static inline const char *
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01004026ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01004027 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4028 unsigned int blink_table_len)
4029{
4030#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01004031 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01004032 blink_table_len);
4033#else
4034 return NULL;
4035#endif
4036}
4037
4038/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004039 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
4040 *
4041 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
4042 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
4043 *
4044 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
4045 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004046void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4047
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004048/**
4049 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
4050 *
4051 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
4052 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07004053 * before calling this function.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004054 *
4055 * @hw: the hardware to free
4056 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004057void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4058
Johannes Bergf2753dd2009-04-14 10:09:24 +02004059/**
4060 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
4061 *
4062 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
4063 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
4064 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
4065 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
4066 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
4067 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
4068 *
4069 * @hw: the hardware to restart
4070 */
4071void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4072
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01004073/**
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02004074 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04004075 *
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02004076 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4077 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4078 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4079 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4080 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4081 *
4082 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4083 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4084 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4085 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4086 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4087 *
4088 * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
4089 *
4090 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
Johannes Bergd63b5482016-03-31 20:02:02 +03004091 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02004092 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4093 * @napi: the NAPI context
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04004094 */
Johannes Bergd63b5482016-03-31 20:02:02 +03004095void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4096 struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi);
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04004097
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004098/**
4099 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
4100 *
4101 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
Zhu Yie3cf8b3f2010-03-29 17:35:07 +08004102 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4103 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4104 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4105 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004106 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004107 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004108 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4109 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02004110 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4111 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004112 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004113 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Bergd20ef632009-10-11 15:10:40 +02004114 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004115 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4116 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004117 */
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02004118static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
4119{
Johannes Bergd63b5482016-03-31 20:02:02 +03004120 ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL);
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02004121}
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004122
4123/**
4124 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
4125 *
4126 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004127 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4128 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004129 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02004130 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
4131 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004132 *
4133 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4134 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004135 */
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02004136void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004137
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004138/**
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004139 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
4140 *
4141 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
4142 * (internally disables bottom halves).
4143 *
4144 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02004145 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4146 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004147 *
4148 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4149 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4150 */
4151static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4152 struct sk_buff *skb)
4153{
4154 local_bh_disable();
4155 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
4156 local_bh_enable();
4157}
4158
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02004159/**
4160 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
4161 *
4162 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
4163 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
4164 * entering/leaving PS mode.
4165 *
4166 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
4167 *
4168 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
4169 * each other.
4170 *
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02004171 * @sta: currently connected sta
4172 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004173 *
4174 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02004175 */
4176int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
4177
4178/**
4179 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
4180 * (in process context)
4181 *
4182 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
4183 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
4184 * applies.
4185 *
4186 * @sta: currently connected sta
4187 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004188 *
4189 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02004190 */
4191static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4192 bool start)
4193{
4194 int ret;
4195
4196 local_bh_disable();
4197 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
4198 local_bh_enable();
4199
4200 return ret;
4201}
4202
Johannes Berg46fa38e2016-05-03 16:58:00 +03004203/**
4204 * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received
4205 * @sta: currently connected station
4206 *
4207 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4208 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a
4209 * connected station was received.
4210 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4211 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must
4212 * be serialized.
4213 */
4214void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4215
4216/**
4217 * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received
4218 * @sta: currently connected station
4219 * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame
4220 *
4221 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4222 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame
4223 * from a connected station was received.
4224 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4225 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be
4226 * serialized.
Emmanuel Grumbach0aa419e2016-10-18 23:12:10 +03004227 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown.
4228 * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC
4229 * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper
4230 * checks.
Johannes Berg46fa38e2016-05-03 16:58:00 +03004231 */
4232void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
4233
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01004234/*
4235 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
4236 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
4237 */
Felix Fietkau651b9922018-02-10 13:20:34 +01004238#define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM ALIGN(14, 4)
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01004239
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004240/**
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004241 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
Randy Dunlapbdfbe802011-05-22 17:22:45 -07004242 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004243 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
4244 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004245 *
4246 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004247 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
4248 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004249 *
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004250 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
4251 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
4252 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
4253 * call! Beware of the locking!)
4254 *
4255 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
4256 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
4257 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
4258 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
4259 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
4260 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
4261 *
4262 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
4263 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
4264 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
4265 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
4266 * use this API.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004267 */
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004268void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4269 u8 tid, bool buffered);
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004270
4271/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02004272 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
4273 *
4274 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
4275 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
4276 * rate selection table for the station entry.
4277 *
4278 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4279 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
4280 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
4281 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
4282 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
4283 */
4284void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4285 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4286 struct sk_buff *skb,
4287 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
4288 int max_rates);
4289
4290/**
Toke Høiland-Jørgensen484a54c2017-04-06 11:38:26 +02004291 * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station
4292 *
4293 * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput
4294 * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can
4295 * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station
4296 * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic
4297 * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause
4298 * slow stations to starve).
4299 *
4300 * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for.
4301 * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps.
4302 */
4303void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4304 u32 thr);
4305
4306/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004307 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
4308 *
4309 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
4310 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
4311 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
4312 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004313 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4314 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01004315 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02004316 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4317 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004318 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004319 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4320 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004321 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004322void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004323 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004324
4325/**
Felix Fietkau5fe49a92017-04-26 17:11:37 +02004326 * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback
4327 *
4328 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4329 * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not
4330 * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info.
4331 *
4332 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4333 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4334 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4335 *
4336 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4337 * @status: tx status information
4338 */
4339void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4340 struct ieee80211_tx_status *status);
4341
4342/**
Felix Fietkauf027c2a2014-11-19 20:08:13 +01004343 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
4344 *
4345 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4346 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
4347 * specific skbs.
4348 *
4349 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4350 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4351 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4352 *
4353 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4354 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
4355 * (NULL for multicast packets)
4356 * @info: tx status information
4357 */
Felix Fietkau5fe49a92017-04-26 17:11:37 +02004358static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4359 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4360 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
4361{
4362 struct ieee80211_tx_status status = {
4363 .sta = sta,
4364 .info = info,
4365 };
4366
4367 ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status);
4368}
Felix Fietkauf027c2a2014-11-19 20:08:13 +01004369
4370/**
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01004371 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
4372 *
4373 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
4374 *
4375 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4376 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
4377 * for a single hardware.
4378 *
4379 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4380 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4381 */
4382static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4383 struct sk_buff *skb)
4384{
4385 local_bh_disable();
4386 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
4387 local_bh_enable();
4388}
4389
4390/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07004391 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004392 *
4393 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
4394 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4395 *
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01004396 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4397 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004398 *
4399 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4400 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004401 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004402void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004403 struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004404
4405/**
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03004406 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
4407 *
4408 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
4409 * connected STA.
4410 *
4411 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
4412 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
4413 */
4414void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
4415
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004416#define IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM 2
4417
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03004418/**
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004419 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
4420 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
4421 * @tim_length: size of TIM element
Luciano Coelho8d77ec82014-05-15 20:32:08 +03004422 * @csa_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
4423 * to CSA counters. This array can contain zero values which
4424 * should be ignored.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004425 */
4426struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
4427 u16 tim_offset;
4428 u16 tim_length;
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004429
4430 u16 csa_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM];
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004431};
4432
4433/**
4434 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
4435 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4436 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4437 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
4438 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
4439 *
4440 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4441 * obtain the beacon template.
4442 *
4443 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
4444 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004445 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
4446 * applicable, the CSA count.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004447 *
4448 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4449 *
4450 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4451 */
4452struct sk_buff *
4453ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4454 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4455 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
4456
4457/**
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004458 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
4459 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004460 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004461 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
4462 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4463 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
4464 * (including the ID and length bytes!).
4465 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4466 *
4467 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004468 * obtain the beacon frame.
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004469 *
4470 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4471 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004472 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
4473 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004474 *
4475 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004476 *
4477 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004478 */
4479struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4480 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4481 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
4482
4483/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004484 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
4485 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004486 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004487 *
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004488 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004489 *
4490 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004491 */
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004492static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4493 struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
4494{
4495 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
4496}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004497
4498/**
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004499 * ieee80211_csa_update_counter - request mac80211 to decrement the csa counter
4500 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4501 *
4502 * The csa counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
4503 * This function is called implicitly when
4504 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
4505 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
4506 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's csa counters.
4507 *
4508 * Return: new csa counter value
4509 */
4510u8 ieee80211_csa_update_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4511
4512/**
Gregory Greenman03737002018-04-20 13:49:24 +03004513 * ieee80211_csa_set_counter - request mac80211 to set csa counter
4514 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4515 * @counter: the new value for the counter
4516 *
4517 * The csa counter can be changed by the device, this API should be
4518 * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211.
4519 *
4520 * It should never be used together with ieee80211_csa_update_counter(),
4521 * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value.
4522 */
4523void ieee80211_csa_set_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter);
4524
4525/**
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004526 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
4527 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4528 *
4529 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02004530 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004531 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
4532 */
4533void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4534
4535/**
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02004536 * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached 1
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004537 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4538 *
4539 * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero.
4540 */
4541bool ieee80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4542
4543
4544/**
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02004545 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
4546 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4547 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4548 *
4549 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4550 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
4551 *
4552 * Can only be called in AP mode.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004553 *
4554 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02004555 */
4556struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4557 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4558
4559/**
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004560 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
4561 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4562 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4563 *
4564 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
4565 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4566 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
4567 *
4568 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4569 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004570 *
4571 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004572 */
4573struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4574 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4575
4576/**
4577 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
4578 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4579 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Berg7b6ddea2017-11-21 14:46:08 +01004580 * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set
4581 * if at all possible
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004582 *
4583 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
4584 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4585 * BSSID and address is used.
4586 *
Johannes Berg7b6ddea2017-11-21 14:46:08 +01004587 * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the
4588 * returned packet will be QoS NDP.
4589 *
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004590 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4591 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004592 *
4593 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004594 */
4595struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg7b6ddea2017-11-21 14:46:08 +01004596 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4597 bool qos_ok);
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004598
4599/**
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004600 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4601 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02004602 * @src_addr: source MAC address
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004603 * @ssid: SSID buffer
4604 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01004605 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004606 *
4607 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4608 * hardware.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004609 *
4610 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004611 */
4612struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02004613 const u8 *src_addr,
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004614 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01004615 size_t tailroom);
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004616
4617/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004618 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
4619 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004620 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004621 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4622 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004623 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004624 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
4625 *
4626 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4627 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4628 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4629 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
4630 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004631void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004632 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004633 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004634 struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
4635
4636/**
4637 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
4638 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004639 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004640 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004641 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004642 *
4643 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4644 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4645 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004646 *
4647 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004648 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004649__le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4650 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004651 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004652
4653/**
4654 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
4655 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004656 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004657 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4658 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004659 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004660 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
4661 *
4662 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4663 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4664 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4665 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
4666 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004667void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4668 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004669 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004670 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004671 struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
4672
4673/**
4674 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
4675 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004676 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004677 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004678 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004679 *
4680 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4681 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4682 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004683 *
4684 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004685 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004686__le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4687 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004688 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004689 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004690
4691/**
4692 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
4693 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004694 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02004695 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004696 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01004697 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004698 *
4699 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
4700 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004701 *
4702 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004703 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004704__le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4705 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +02004706 enum nl80211_band band,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004707 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01004708 struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004709
4710/**
4711 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
4712 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004713 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004714 *
4715 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
4716 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
4717 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
4718 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004719 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
4720 *
4721 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
4722 * frames are available.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004723 *
4724 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
4725 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
4726 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
4727 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
4728 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
4729 * use common code for all beacons.
4730 */
4731struct sk_buff *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004732ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004733
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004734/**
Johannes Berg42d987952011-07-07 18:58:01 +02004735 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
4736 *
4737 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
4738 *
4739 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4740 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4741 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4742 */
4743void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4744 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4745
4746/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004747 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd42008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004748 *
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004749 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
4750 * from the given packet.
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd42008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004751 *
4752 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004753 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
4754 * with this P1K
4755 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd42008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004756 */
Johannes Berg42d987952011-07-07 18:58:01 +02004757static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4758 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
4759{
4760 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
4761 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
4762 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
4763
4764 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
4765}
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004766
4767/**
Johannes Berg8bca5d82011-07-13 19:50:34 +02004768 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
4769 *
4770 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
4771 * and transmitter address.
4772 *
4773 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4774 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
4775 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4776 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4777 */
4778void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4779 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4780
4781/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004782 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
4783 *
4784 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
4785 * in the packet.
4786 *
4787 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4788 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
4789 * encrypted with this key
4790 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
4791 */
4792void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4793 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004794
4795/**
Eliad Pellerf8079d42016-02-14 13:56:35 +02004796 * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos
4797 *
4798 * @pos: start of crypto header
4799 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4800 * @pn: PN to add
4801 *
4802 * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of
4803 * the packet payload)
4804 *
4805 * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should
4806 * point to the crypto header)
4807 */
4808u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn);
4809
4810/**
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004811 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
4812 *
4813 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004814 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004815 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4816 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4817 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
4818 *
4819 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
4820 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
4821 * by the device and not by mac80211.
4822 *
4823 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4824 * can be done concurrently.
4825 */
4826void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4827 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4828
4829/**
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02004830 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
4831 *
4832 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004833 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02004834 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4835 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4836 * @seq: new sequence data
4837 *
4838 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
4839 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
4840 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
4841 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
4842 *
4843 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4844 * can be done concurrently.
4845 */
4846void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4847 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4848
4849/**
4850 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
4851 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4852 *
4853 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
4854 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
4855 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
4856 *
4857 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
4858 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
4859 */
4860void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4861
4862/**
4863 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
4864 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
4865 * @keyconf: new key data
4866 *
4867 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
4868 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
4869 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
4870 *
4871 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
4872 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
4873 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
4874 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
4875 *
4876 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
4877 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
4878 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
4879 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
4880 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
4881 * of the reconfiguration.
4882 *
4883 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
4884 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
4885 *
4886 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
4887 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
4888 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
4889 * the key that's being replaced.
4890 */
4891struct ieee80211_key_conf *
4892ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4893 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4894
4895/**
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004896 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
4897 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
4898 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
4899 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
4900 * @gfp: allocation flags
4901 */
4902void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
4903 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
4904
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd42008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004905/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004906 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
4907 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4908 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4909 *
4910 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4911 */
4912void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4913
4914/**
4915 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
4916 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4917 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4918 *
4919 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4920 */
4921void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4922
4923/**
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004924 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
4925 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4926 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4927 *
4928 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004929 *
4930 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004931 */
4932
4933int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4934
4935/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004936 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
4937 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4938 *
4939 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4940 */
4941void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4942
4943/**
4944 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
4945 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4946 *
4947 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4948 */
4949void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4950
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004951/**
4952 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
4953 *
4954 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
4955 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
Johannes Berg8789d452010-08-26 13:30:26 +02004956 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
4957 * any context, including hardirq context.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004958 *
4959 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
Avraham Stern7947d3e2016-07-05 15:23:12 +03004960 * @info: information about the completed scan
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004961 */
Avraham Stern7947d3e2016-07-05 15:23:12 +03004962void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4963 struct cfg80211_scan_info *info);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004964
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004965/**
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03004966 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
4967 *
4968 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
4969 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
4970 *
4971 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4972 */
4973void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4974
4975/**
4976 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
4977 *
4978 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
4979 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
4980 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
4981 * while associating, for instance.
4982 *
4983 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4984 */
4985void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4986
4987/**
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004988 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
4989 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
4990 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
4991 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
4992 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
4993 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
4994 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
4995 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004996 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004997 */
4998enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
4999 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0,
5000 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0),
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02005001 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1),
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01005002};
5003
5004/**
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02005005 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
5006 *
5007 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5008 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
5009 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
5010 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5011 *
5012 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5013 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5014 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5015 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5016 */
5017void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5018 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5019 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5020 void *data);
5021
5022/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07005023 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01005024 *
5025 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5026 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02005027 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
5028 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
5029 * be used.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01005030 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01005031 *
5032 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01005033 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02005034 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01005035 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5036 */
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02005037static inline void
5038ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5039 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5040 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5041 void *data)
5042{
5043 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
5044 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
5045 iterator, data);
5046}
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01005047
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005048/**
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02005049 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
5050 *
5051 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5052 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5053 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5054 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01005055 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02005056 *
5057 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01005058 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02005059 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5060 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5061 */
5062void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01005063 u32 iter_flags,
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02005064 void (*iterator)(void *data,
5065 u8 *mac,
5066 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5067 void *data);
5068
5069/**
Johannes Bergc7c71062013-08-21 22:07:20 +02005070 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
5071 *
5072 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5073 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5074 * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
5075 *
5076 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5077 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5078 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5079 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5080 */
5081void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5082 u32 iter_flags,
5083 void (*iterator)(void *data,
5084 u8 *mac,
5085 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5086 void *data);
5087
5088/**
Arik Nemtsov0fc1e042014-10-22 12:30:59 +03005089 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
5090 *
5091 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
5092 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
5093 * function for them.
5094 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5095 *
5096 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5097 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5098 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5099 */
5100void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5101 void (*iterator)(void *data,
5102 struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
5103 void *data);
5104/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04005105 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5106 *
5107 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
5108 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
5109 *
5110 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5111 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
5112 */
5113void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
5114
5115/**
5116 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5117 *
5118 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
5119 * workqueue.
5120 *
5121 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5122 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
5123 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
5124 */
5125void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5126 struct delayed_work *dwork,
5127 unsigned long delay);
5128
5129/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005130 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01005131 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005132 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05305133 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07005134 *
5135 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005136 *
5137 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5138 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5139 * will be managed by the mac80211.
5140 */
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05305141int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
5142 u16 timeout);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005143
5144/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005145 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01005146 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005147 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5148 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5149 *
5150 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02005151 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
5152 * from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005153 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01005154void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005155 u16 tid);
5156
5157/**
5158 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01005159 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005160 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07005161 *
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02005162 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005163 *
5164 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5165 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5166 * will be managed by the mac80211.
5167 */
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02005168int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005169
5170/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005171 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01005172 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005173 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5174 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
5175 *
5176 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02005177 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
5178 * can be called from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005179 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01005180void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005181 u16 tid);
5182
Mohamed Abbas84363e62008-04-04 16:59:58 -07005183/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02005184 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
5185 *
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005186 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02005187 * @addr: station's address
5188 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005189 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5190 *
5191 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02005192 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5193 */
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005194struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02005195 const u8 *addr);
5196
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005197/**
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005198 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005199 *
5200 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005201 * @addr: remote station's address
5202 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005203 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005204 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5205 *
5206 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005207 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5208 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005209 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
5210 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
5211 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
5212 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
5213 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
5214 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
5215 * is not reliable.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005216 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005217 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005218 */
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005219struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5220 const u8 *addr,
5221 const u8 *localaddr);
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005222
5223/**
Johannes Bergaf818582009-11-06 11:35:50 +01005224 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
5225 * @hw: the hardware
5226 * @pubsta: the station
5227 * @block: whether to block or unblock
5228 *
5229 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
5230 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
5231 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
5232 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
5233 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
5234 *
5235 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
5236 * manner.
5237 *
5238 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
5239 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
5240 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
5241 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
5242 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
5243 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
5244 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
5245 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
5246 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
5247 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
5248 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
5249 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
5250 * woke up while blocked or not.
5251 */
5252void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5253 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
5254
5255/**
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02005256 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
5257 * @pubsta: the station
5258 *
5259 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
5260 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
5261 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
5262 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
5263 *
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01005264 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
5265 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
5266 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
5267 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
5268 *
5269 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
5270 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
5271 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
5272 * and restore the _irqsafe version!
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02005273 */
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01005274void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02005275
5276/**
Emmanuel Grumbach0ead2512015-11-17 10:24:36 +02005277 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
5278 * @pubsta: the station
5279 * @tid: the tid of the NDP
5280 *
5281 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
5282 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
5283 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
5284 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
5285 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
5286 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
5287 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
5288 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
5289 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
5290 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
5291 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
5292 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
5293 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
5294 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
5295 */
5296void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);
5297
5298/**
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02005299 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
5300 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5301 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5302 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5303 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5304 *
5305 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5306 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5307 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
5308 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
5309 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
5310 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
Johannes Bergf850e002011-07-13 19:50:53 +02005311 *
5312 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
5313 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
5314 * set_key callback.
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02005315 */
5316void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5317 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5318 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5319 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5320 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5321 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5322 void *data),
5323 void *iter_data);
5324
5325/**
Eliad Pelleref044762015-11-17 10:24:37 +02005326 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device
5327 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5328 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5329 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5330 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5331 *
5332 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5333 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5334 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station
5335 * in removal process will be skipped.
5336 *
5337 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section,
5338 * and thus iter must be atomic.
5339 */
5340void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5341 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5342 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5343 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5344 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5345 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5346 void *data),
5347 void *iter_data);
5348
5349/**
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02005350 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
5351 * @hw: pointre obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5352 * @iter: iterator function
5353 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
5354 *
5355 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
5356 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
5357 * places while calling into the driver.
5358 *
5359 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
5360 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
5361 * removed.
Johannes Berg8a61af62012-12-13 17:42:30 +01005362 *
5363 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
5364 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
5365 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
5366 * or not.
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02005367 */
5368void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
5369 struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5370 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5371 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
5372 void *data),
5373 void *iter_data);
5374
5375/**
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02005376 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5377 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5378 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5379 *
5380 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5381 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
5382 * information. This function must only be called from within the
5383 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
5384 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005385 * %NULL.
5386 *
5387 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02005388 */
5389struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5390 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5391
5392/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005393 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
5394 *
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01005395 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005396 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01005397 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005398 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005399 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
5400 */
5401void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005402
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005403/**
5404 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
5405 *
5406 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5407 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01005408 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005409 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
5410 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
Johannes Berg682bd382013-01-29 13:13:50 +01005411 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
5412 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005413 *
5414 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
5415 * without connection recovery attempts.
5416 */
5417void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5418
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005419/**
Johannes Berg95acac62011-07-12 12:30:59 +02005420 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
5421 *
5422 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5423 *
5424 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
5425 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
5426 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
5427 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
5428 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
5429 *
5430 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
5431 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
5432 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
5433 * disconnect normally later.
5434 *
5435 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
5436 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
5437 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
5438 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
5439 */
5440void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5441
5442/**
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005443 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
5444 * rssi threshold triggered
5445 *
5446 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5447 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
Andrzej Zaborowski769f07d2017-01-25 12:43:40 +01005448 * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005449 * @gfp: context flags
5450 *
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01005451 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005452 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
5453 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
5454 */
5455void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5456 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
Andrzej Zaborowski769f07d2017-01-25 12:43:40 +01005457 s32 rssi_level,
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005458 gfp_t gfp);
5459
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02005460/**
Johannes Berg98f03342014-11-26 12:42:02 +01005461 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
5462 *
5463 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5464 * @gfp: context flags
5465 */
5466void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
5467
5468/**
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01005469 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
5470 *
5471 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5472 */
5473void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5474
5475/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02005476 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
5477 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5478 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
5479 *
5480 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
5481 * and wake up the suspended queues.
5482 */
5483void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
5484
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02005485/**
5486 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
5487 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Berg633dd1e2010-08-18 15:01:23 +02005488 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02005489 *
5490 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
5491 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
5492 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
5493 */
5494void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5495 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
5496
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02005497/**
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01005498 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
5499 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5500 */
5501void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5502
5503/**
5504 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
5505 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5506 */
5507void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5508
Shahar Levif41ccd72011-05-22 16:10:21 +03005509/**
5510 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
5511 *
5512 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
5513 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
5514 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
5515 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
5516 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
5517 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
5518 *
5519 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5520 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
5521 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
5522 */
5523void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
5524 const u8 *addr);
5525
Felix Fietkau8c771242011-08-20 15:53:55 +02005526/**
Sara Sharon06470f72016-01-28 16:19:25 +02005527 * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered
5528 * @pubsta: station struct
5529 * @tid: the session's TID
5530 * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are
5531 * assumed to be out of the window after the call
5532 * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc.
5533 * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware
5534 *
5535 * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and
5536 * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it
5537 * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released
5538 * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.)
5539 */
5540void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5541 u16 ssn, u64 filtered,
5542 u16 received_mpdus);
5543
5544/**
Felix Fietkau8c771242011-08-20 15:53:55 +02005545 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
5546 *
5547 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
5548 * buffer.
5549 *
5550 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5551 * @ra: the peer's destination address
5552 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
5553 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
5554 */
5555void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
5556
Luca Coelho1272c5d2017-08-18 15:33:56 +03005557/**
5558 * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work
5559 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5560 * @addr: station mac address
5561 * @tid: the rx tid
5562 */
Johannes Berg699cb582017-05-30 16:34:46 +02005563void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr,
Luca Coelho1272c5d2017-08-18 15:33:56 +03005564 unsigned int tid);
Johannes Berg699cb582017-05-30 16:34:46 +02005565
Michal Kazior08cf42e2014-07-16 12:12:15 +02005566/**
5567 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
5568 *
5569 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5570 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5571 * reordering.
5572 *
5573 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5574 * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
5575 *
5576 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5577 * @addr: station mac address
5578 * @tid: the rx tid
5579 */
Johannes Berg699cb582017-05-30 16:34:46 +02005580static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5581 const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
5582{
5583 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
5584 return;
5585 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid);
5586}
Michal Kazior08cf42e2014-07-16 12:12:15 +02005587
5588/**
5589 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
5590 *
5591 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5592 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5593 * reordering.
5594 *
5595 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5596 * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
5597 *
5598 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5599 * @addr: station mac address
5600 * @tid: the rx tid
5601 */
Johannes Berg699cb582017-05-30 16:34:46 +02005602static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5603 const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
5604{
5605 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
5606 return;
5607 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS);
5608}
Michal Kazior08cf42e2014-07-16 12:12:15 +02005609
Naftali Goldstein04c2cf32017-07-11 10:07:25 +03005610/**
5611 * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout
5612 *
5613 * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx
5614 * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer.
5615 *
5616 * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa.
5617 *
5618 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5619 * @addr: station mac address
5620 * @tid: the rx tid
5621 */
5622void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5623 const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid);
5624
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005625/* Rate control API */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005626
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005627/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005628 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005629 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005630 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
5631 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
5632 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005633 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
5634 * to be filled in
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005635 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
5636 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
5637 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
5638 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
5639 * RTS threshold
5640 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
5641 * if the selected rate supports it
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005642 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02005643 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01005644 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005645 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005646struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
5647 struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
5648 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
5649 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
5650 struct sk_buff *skb;
5651 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
5652 bool rts, short_preamble;
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02005653 u32 rate_idx_mask;
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02005654 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01005655 bool bss;
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005656};
5657
5658struct rate_control_ops {
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005659 const char *name;
5660 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct dentry *debugfsdir);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005661 void (*free)(void *priv);
5662
5663 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
5664 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02005665 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005666 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
Sujith81cb7622009-02-12 11:38:37 +05305667 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02005668 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg64f68e52012-03-28 10:58:37 +02005669 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5670 u32 changed);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005671 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5672 void *priv_sta);
5673
Felix Fietkau18fb84d2017-04-26 17:11:35 +02005674 void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv,
5675 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5676 void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005677 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5678 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5679 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005680 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5681 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005682
5683 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
5684 struct dentry *dir);
5685 void (*remove_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta);
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02005686
5687 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005688};
5689
5690static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +02005691 enum nl80211_band band,
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005692 int index)
5693{
5694 return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
5695}
5696
Luis R. Rodriguez4c6d4f52009-07-16 10:05:41 -07005697/**
5698 * rate_control_send_low - helper for drivers for management/no-ack frames
5699 *
5700 * Rate control algorithms that agree to use the lowest rate to
5701 * send management frames and NO_ACK data with the respective hw
5702 * retries should use this in the beginning of their mac80211 get_rate
5703 * callback. If true is returned the rate control can simply return.
5704 * If false is returned we guarantee that sta and sta and priv_sta is
5705 * not null.
5706 *
5707 * Rate control algorithms wishing to do more intelligent selection of
5708 * rate for multicast/broadcast frames may choose to not use this.
5709 *
5710 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. Note
5711 * that this may be null.
5712 * @priv_sta: private rate control structure. This may be null.
5713 * @txrc: rate control information we sholud populate for mac80211.
5714 */
5715bool rate_control_send_low(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5716 void *priv_sta,
5717 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
5718
5719
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005720static inline s8
5721rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5722 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5723{
5724 int i;
5725
5726 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5727 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5728 return i;
5729
5730 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01005731 WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005732
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01005733 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005734 return 0;
5735}
5736
Luis R. Rodriguezb770b432009-07-16 10:15:09 -07005737static inline
5738bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5739 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5740{
5741 unsigned int i;
5742
5743 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5744 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5745 return true;
5746 return false;
5747}
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005748
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02005749/**
5750 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
5751 *
5752 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
5753 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
5754 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
5755 * the most recent rate control module decision.
5756 *
5757 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5758 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
5759 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
5760 */
5761int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5762 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
5763 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
5764
Johannes Berg631ad702014-01-20 23:29:34 +01005765int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
5766void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005767
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005768static inline bool
5769conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5770{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005771 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005772}
5773
5774static inline bool
5775conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5776{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005777 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5778 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005779}
5780
5781static inline bool
5782conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5783{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005784 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5785 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005786}
5787
5788static inline bool
5789conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5790{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005791 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005792}
5793
5794static inline bool
5795conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5796{
Rostislav Lisovy041f6072014-04-02 15:31:55 +02005797 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
5798 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
5799 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005800}
5801
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02005802static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5803ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
5804{
5805 if (p2p) {
5806 switch (type) {
5807 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
5808 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
5809 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
5810 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
5811 default:
5812 break;
5813 }
5814 }
5815 return type;
5816}
5817
5818static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5819ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
5820{
5821 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
5822}
5823
Sara Sharon65554d02016-02-16 12:48:17 +02005824/**
5825 * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data
5826 *
5827 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
5828 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
5829 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
5830 *
5831 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and
5832 * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the
5833 * matching GroupId management frame.
5834 * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path.
5835 */
5836void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5837 const u8 *membership, const u8 *position);
5838
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07005839void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5840 int rssi_min_thold,
5841 int rssi_max_thold);
5842
5843void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Arik Nemtsov768db342011-09-28 14:12:51 +03005844
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005845/**
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005846 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005847 *
5848 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
5849 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005850 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
5851 *
5852 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
5853 * applicable.
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005854 */
Wey-Yi Guy1dae27f2012-04-13 12:02:57 -07005855int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5856
Johannes Bergcd8f7cb2013-01-22 12:34:29 +01005857/**
5858 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
5859 * @vif: virtual interface
5860 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
5861 * @gfp: allocation flags
5862 *
5863 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
5864 */
5865void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5866 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
5867 gfp_t gfp);
5868
Felix Fietkau06be6b12013-10-14 18:01:00 +02005869/**
5870 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
5871 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5872 * @vif: virtual interface
5873 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
5874 * @band: the band to transmit on
5875 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
5876 *
5877 * Note: must be called under RCU lock
5878 */
5879bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5880 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
5881 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
5882
Felix Fietkaua7022e62013-12-16 21:49:14 +01005883/**
5884 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
5885 *
5886 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
5887 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
5888 *
5889 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
5890 *
5891 * private:
5892 *
5893 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
5894 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
5895 */
5896struct ieee80211_noa_data {
5897 u32 next_tsf;
5898 bool has_next_tsf;
5899
5900 u8 absent;
5901
5902 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5903 struct {
5904 u32 start;
5905 u32 duration;
5906 u32 interval;
5907 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5908};
5909
5910/**
5911 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
5912 *
5913 * @attr: P2P NoA IE
5914 * @data: NoA tracking data
5915 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5916 *
5917 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
5918 */
5919int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
5920 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5921
5922/**
5923 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
5924 *
5925 * @data: NoA tracking data
5926 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5927 */
5928void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5929
Arik Nemtsovc887f0d32014-06-11 17:18:25 +03005930/**
5931 * ieee80211_tdls_oper - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
5932 * @vif: virtual interface
5933 * @peer: the peer's destination address
5934 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
5935 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
5936 * @gfp: allocation flags
5937 *
5938 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
5939 */
5940void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
5941 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
5942 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
Andrei Otcheretianskia7f3a762014-10-22 15:22:49 +03005943
5944/**
Liad Kaufmanb6da9112014-11-19 13:47:38 +02005945 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
5946 *
5947 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
5948 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
5949 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
5950 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
5951 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
5952 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
5953 *
5954 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
5955 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
5956 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5957 *
5958 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
5959 * @tid: the TID to reserve
5960 *
5961 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
5962 */
5963int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5964
5965/**
5966 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
5967 *
5968 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
5969 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
5970 * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
5971 *
5972 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
5973 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
5974 * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5975 *
5976 * @sta: the station
5977 * @tid: the TID to unreserve
5978 */
5979void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5980
5981/**
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01005982 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
5983 *
5984 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Johannes Berge7881bd52017-12-19 10:11:54 +01005985 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01005986 *
5987 * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
5988 */
5989struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5990 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
Michal Kaziorf2ac7e302016-01-27 15:26:12 +01005991
5992/**
5993 * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq
5994 *
5995 * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e.
5996 * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up
5997 * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa.
5998 *
5999 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6000 * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count
6001 * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count
6002 */
6003void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6004 unsigned long *frame_cnt,
6005 unsigned long *byte_cnt);
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03006006
6007/**
6008 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination.
6009 *
6010 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination.
6011 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6012 *
6013 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6014 * @inst_id: the local instance id
6015 * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*)
6016 * @gfp: allocation flags
6017 */
6018void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6019 u8 inst_id,
6020 enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason,
6021 gfp_t gfp);
Ayala Beker92bc43b2016-09-20 17:31:21 +03006022
6023/**
6024 * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event.
6025 *
6026 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The
6027 * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211.
6028 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6029 *
6030 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6031 * @match: match event information
6032 * @gfp: allocation flags
6033 */
6034void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6035 struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match,
6036 gfp_t gfp);
6037
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07006038#endif /* MAC80211_H */